Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series User Manual


Add to my manuals
226 Pages

advertisement

Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series User Manual | Manualzz

GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL

GOT2000

Series

User's Manual (Hardware)

Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).

Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.

The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.

In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

WARNING

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances. Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING

Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.

Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch.

An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident.Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.

An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning.

Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

A - 1

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING

When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows.Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

When the GOT backlight has a failure, the POWER LED blinks (orange/blue) and the display section dims. In such a case, the input by the touch switch(s) is disabled.

• GT21

When the GOT backlight has a failure, the display section dims. In such a case, the input by the touch switches is disabled.

Even if the display section dims on the liquid crystal of the GOT, the input by the touch switch(s) may remain enabled. This may cause a malfunction of the touch switch.

For example, if an operator assumes that the display section has dimmed because of the screen save function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save, a touch switch may be activated.

The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT.

The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.

When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously, an accident may occur due to incorrect output or malfunction.

• GT27

Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

• GT25,GT23,GT21

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause a touch switch near the touched points to operate unexpectedly, or may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible.

Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.

For bus connection (GT27,GT25 Only) : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes

inoperative.

For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative.

A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur.

Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

A - 2

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.

Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.

Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.

Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.

Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.

When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration.

• When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network :

Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.

• When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network :

Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.

Doing so can cause the IP address duplication.

The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address

(192.168.3.18).

The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.

Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT.

Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.

When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the screen of the GOT might flicker.

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel.

Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27,GT25 Only)

A - 3

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.

Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.

When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

Specified torque range (0.36 N•m to 0.48 N•m)

• GT21

Specified torque range (0.20 N•m to 0.25 N•m)

Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the

GOT.

When mounting a unit on the GOT, tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque range.

• GT27,GT25

When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 N•m to 0.48 N•m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.

When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 N•m to 0.14 N•m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1.

When the GOT is installed vertically, its side interface is positioned on the bottom.

To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface, install or remove the unit while holding it with hands.

• GT2103-P

When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT, fit it to the side of the GOT and tighten the tapping screws in the specified torque range (0.3 N•m to 0.6 N•m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.

Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

When closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover to the GOT by pushing the

[PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure.(GT27,GT25 Only)

Remove the protective film of the GOT.

When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.

In addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly

Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity, and vibrations.

When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil.

Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.

Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.

A - 4

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less. (GT21 does not have the LG terminal.)

When tightening the terminal screws, use a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

Specified torque range (0.5 N•m to 0.8 N•m)

For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section, use the following terminal.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with the specified torque.

Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

• GT21

Connect a stranded wire or a single wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product.

Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

Specified torque range (0.5 N•m to 0.8 N•m)

• GT21

Specified torque range (0.22 N•m to 0.25 N•m)

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.

Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the module during wiring.

Do not peel this label during wiring.Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation. (GT27,GT25 Only)

Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range.

Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller(A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".

After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.

Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.(GT27,GT25 Only)

A - 5

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING

Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or

OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.

During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system.

False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING

When power is on, do not touch the terminals.

Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.

Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.

Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases.

Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.

Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

A - 6

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the unit.

Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.

Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.

Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.

The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion.

Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result.

Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.

If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.

Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc.

Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.

Dispose of used battery promptly.

Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor.

Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.

However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses.

When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration.

When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated.

This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.

A - 7

[PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE DATA STORAGE IS IN USE]

WARNING

If the SD card is removed from drive A of the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the GOT may stop processing data for about 20 seconds.

The GOT cannot be operated during this period.

The functions that run in the background including a screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and others are also interrupted.

Before removing the SD card, check the following items.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

Check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

• GT21

Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

CAUTION

If the data storage is removed from the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the data storage and files may be damaged.

Before removing the data storage from the GOT, check the SD card access LED, system signal, or others to make sure that the data storage is not accessed.

Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files.

When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

When inserting a SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover.

Not doing so causes the data not to be read or written.

• GT21

When inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the

GOT utility in advance.

Not doing so causes the data not to be read or written.

When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out.

Not doing so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly.

Not doing so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

Before removing the USB device from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT.

After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the USB device by hand carefully.

Not doing so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

A - 8

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.

(Refer to 9.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement for details of the battery

directive in the EU member states.)

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

(Refer to 11.3 Transportation Precautions for details of the regulated models.)

Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual, as they are precision devices.

Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.

Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.

When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products.

Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method).

Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.

A - 9

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1

CONTENTS ............................................................................................................................................A - 10

List of Manuals for GT Works3 ...............................................................................................................A - 13

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, the meaning of the icon .........................................................................A - 14

1. OVERVIEW

1.1

1.2

GOT ................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 2

Features........................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1

Overall Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 2 - 2

2.2

2.2.1

2.2.2

How to Read the Model Name......................................................................................................... 2 - 2

GOT model name..................................................................................................................... 2 - 2

Option model name.................................................................................................................. 2 - 3

2.3

2.3.1

2.3.2

2.3.3

2.3.4

2.3.5

2.3.6

2.3.7

System Equipment........................................................................................................................... 2 - 5

GOT ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 5

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit set ................................................................... 2 - 7

Extension unit........................................................................................................................... 2 - 8

Software ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 10

Option..................................................................................................................................... 2 - 11

Cable...................................................................................................................................... 2 - 13

Others .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 24

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.1

3.1.1

3.1.2

3.1.3

General Specifications..................................................................................................................... 3 - 2

GT27,GT25 .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 2

GT23 ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 3

GT21 ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 4

3.2

3.2.1

3.2.2

3.2.3

3.2.4

Performance Specifications ............................................................................................................. 3 - 5

GT27 ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 5

GT25 ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 15

GT23 ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 21

GT21 ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 25

3.3

3.3.1

3.3.2

3.3.3

3.3.4

Specifications of Power Supply Section ........................................................................................ 3 - 29

GT27 ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 29

GT25 ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 31

GT23 ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 32

GT21 ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 34

3.4

Battery Specifications .................................................................................................................... 3 - 35

4. PART NAMES AND SETTINGS

4.1

4.2

4.3

GT27, GT25..................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2

GT23................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 6

GT21................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 8

A - 10

5. EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE

5.1

5.1.1

5.1.2

Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 2

Conforming standards in the EMC Directive ............................................................................ 5 - 2

Conforming standards in the Low Voltage Directive ................................................................ 5 - 3

5.2

5.2.1

5.2.2

5.2.3

5.2.4

5.2.5

5.2.6

EMC Directive Requirements .......................................................................................................... 5 - 4

Installing the GOT on the control panel.................................................................................... 5 - 4

Installing a noise filter (power supply line filter)........................................................................ 5 - 5

System configuration................................................................................................................ 5 - 6

Connection of power cables and ground cables .................................................................... 5 - 11

Fabricating a connection cable .............................................................................................. 5 - 12

Grounding a cable.................................................................................................................. 5 - 18

5.3

5.3.1

5.3.2

5.3.3

5.3.4

Low Voltage Directive Requirements............................................................................................. 5 - 19

Power supply.......................................................................................................................... 5 - 19

Control panel.......................................................................................................................... 5 - 19

Grounding .............................................................................................................................. 5 - 20

External wiring........................................................................................................................ 5 - 20

6. INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

Installation Precautions.................................................................................................................... 6 - 2

Panel Cut Dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 6 - 2

Installation Position.......................................................................................................................... 6 - 5

Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle..................................................... 6 - 11

6.5

6.5.1

6.5.2

Installing and Removing the GOT.................................................................................................. 6 - 13

Installing the GOT .................................................................................................................. 6 - 13

Removing the GOT ................................................................................................................ 6 - 16

6.6

6.6.1

6.6.2

Installing and Removing the Extension Unit .................................................................................. 6 - 18

Installing multiple extension units........................................................................................... 6 - 18

Removing the extension unit.................................................................................................. 6 - 20

6.7

6.7.1

6.7.2

Installing and Removing the Battery .............................................................................................. 6 - 21

Installing the battery............................................................................................................... 6 - 21

Removing the battery ............................................................................................................. 6 - 27

6.8

6.8.1

6.8.2

Installing and Removing the SD Card............................................................................................ 6 - 31

Installing the SD card ............................................................................................................. 6 - 32

Removing the SD card ........................................................................................................... 6 - 34

6.9

6.9.1

6.9.2

Installing and Removing the USB Devices .................................................................................... 6 - 36

Installing the USB devices ..................................................................................................... 6 - 36

Removing the USB devices ................................................................................................... 6 - 36

6.10

Installing and Removing the USB cable ........................................................................................ 6 - 37

6.10.1

Installing the USB cable ......................................................................................................... 6 - 37

6.10.2

Removing the USB cable ....................................................................................................... 6 - 38

7. WIRNG OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION

7.1

7.2

Wiring of External Power Supply ..................................................................................................... 7 - 3

Power Supply Wiring to th GOT....................................................................................................... 7 - 4

7.3

7.3.1

7.3.2

Grounding ........................................................................................................................................ 7 - 6

Grounding the GOT.................................................................................................................. 7 - 6

Causes of wiring-related malfunction and countermeasure examples..................................... 7 - 8

A - 11

7.4

7.4.1

7.4.2

Wiring Inside and Outside the Control Panel................................................................................. 7 - 10

Control panel inside wiring ..................................................................................................... 7 - 10

Control panel outside wiring................................................................................................... 7 - 10

7.5

Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment .................................................................... 7 - 11

7.6

7.6.1

Grounding the Extension Unit........................................................................................................ 7 - 12

Wiring of the FG cable of a bus connection cable.................................................................. 7 - 12

8. OPERATING THE GOT

8.1

8.2

Outline Procedure to Start the GOT ................................................................................................ 8 - 2

Creating Project Data ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 5

9. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

Daily Inspection ............................................................................................................................... 9 - 3

Periodic Inspection .......................................................................................................................... 9 - 4

Screen Cleaning Method ................................................................................................................. 9 - 5

Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement ............................................................... 9 - 6

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

10.1

GOT Restoration Sheets ............................................................................................................... 10 - 2

10.1.1

GOT status check sheet......................................................................................................... 10 - 3

10.1.2

10.1.3

GOT installation status check sheet....................................................................................... 10 - 8

System configuration check sheet ....................................................................................... 10 - 13

10.2

Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection ..................................................................................... 10 - 14

10.2.1

Identifying the error position................................................................................................. 10 - 14

10.2.2

Narrowing the possible error positions................................................................................. 10 - 15

10.2.3

Specific example of troubleshooting .................................................................................... 10 - 16

10.3

Error Messages and System Alarms ........................................................................................... 10 - 17

10.3.1

Displayed contents............................................................................................................... 10 - 17

10.3.2

Error messages and system alarms..................................................................................... 10 - 18

11. APPENDICES

11.1

External Dimension Diagrams ....................................................................................................... 11 - 2

11.2

Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards .................................................................... 11 - 22

11.2.1

GT27, GT25, GT23 .............................................................................................................. 11 - 22

11.2.2

GT21 .................................................................................................................................... 11 - 23

11.3

Transportation Precautions.......................................................................................................... 11 - 23

11.3.1

Relevant models .................................................................................................................. 11 - 23

11.3.2

Transportation guidelines..................................................................................................... 11 - 23

11.4

Calculating consumed current of GT2705-V................................................................................ 11 - 24

REVISIONS

WARRANTY

A - 12

List of Manuals for GT Works3

For the manuals related to this product, install the manuals with the drawing software.

If you need a printed manual, consult your local Mitsubishi representative or branch office.

1. List of Manuals for GT Designer3(GOT2000)

(1) Screen drawing software manuals

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

Manual name

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3

GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1

Manual number

(Model code)

-

-

SH-080862ENG

(1D7MB2)

SH-081228ENG

(2) Connection manuals

Manual name

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) For GT Works3 Version1

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3

Version1

Manual number

(Model code)

SH-081197ENG

(1D7MJ8)

SH-081198ENG

SH-081199ENG

SH-081200ENG

(3) GT SoftGOT2000 manuals

Manual name

Manual number

(Model code)

SH-081201ENG GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual

(4) GOT2000 manuals

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)

Manual name

Manual number

(Model code)

SH-081194ENG

(1D7MJ5)

SH-081195ENG

(1D7MJ6)

SH-081196ENG

(1D7MJ7)

A - 13

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, the meaning of the icon

The following shows the abbreviations and generic terms used in Help.

1. GOT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GOT2000

Series

GT27-X

GT27-S

GT27 GT27-V

GT27-S

GT27-V

GT25-S

GT25

GT25-V

GT23 GT23-V

GT2715-X

GT2712-S

GT2710-S

GT2710-V

GT2708-S

GT2708-V

GT2705-V

GT2512-S

GT2510-V

GT2508-V

GT2310-V

GT2308-V

GT2715-XTBA, GT2715-XTBD

GT2712-STBA, GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STBD, GT2712-STWD

GT2710-STBA, GT2710-STBD

GT2710-VTBA, GT2710-VTWA, GT2710-VTBD, GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-STBA, GT2708-STBD

GT2708-VTBA, GT2708-VTBD

GT2705-VTBD

GT2512-STBA, GT2512-STBD

GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTWA, GT2510-VTBD, GT2510-VTWD

GT2508-VTBA, GT2508-VTWA, GT2508-VTBD, GT2508-VTWD

GT2310-VTBA, GT2310-VTBD

GT2308-VTBA, GT2308-VTBD

GT21

GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD

GT2103-PMBD

GT21

GT21-P GT2103-P

GT2103-PMBDS

GT2103-PMBDS2

GT2103-PMBLS

GT SoftGOT2000

GOT1000 Series

GOT900 Series

GOT800 Series

GT SoftGOT2000 Version1

GOT1000 Series

GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series

GOT-800 Series

Meaning of icon

Support

Not support

-

-

-

A - 14

2. Communication unit

Abbreviations and generic terms

Bus connection unit

Serial communication unit

MELSECNET/H communication unit

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

CC-Link communication unit

Wireless LAN communication unit

Serial multi-drop connection unit

Connection conversion adapter

Field network adapter unit

3. Option unit

Abbreviations and generic terms

Printer unit

Video/RGB unit

Video input unit

RGB input unit

Video/RGB input unit

RGB output unit

Multimedia unit

Video signal conversion unit

External I/O unit

Sound output unit

SD card unit

4. Option

Abbreviations and generic terms

SD card

Battery

Protective sheet

Protective cover for oil

USB environmental protection cover

Stand

Attachment

Description

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL,

GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2

GT15-J61BT13

GT25-WLAN

GT01-RS4-M

GT10-9PT5S

GT25-FNADP

Description

GT15-PRN

GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)

GT27-R2, GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)

GT27-ROUT, GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)

GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)

GT27-IF1000

GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT

GT21-03SDCD

Description

NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD,

L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD

GT11-50BAT

GT27-15PSGC, GT25-12PSGC, GT25-10PSGC, GT25-08PSGC, GT25-

05PSGC, GT21-04RPSGC-UC, GT21-03PSGC-UC, GT27-15PSCC, GT25-

12PSCC, GT25-10PSCC, GT25-08PSCC, GT25-12PSCC-UC, GT25-

10PSCC-UC, GT25-08PSCC-UC, GT25-05PSCC, GT21-04RPSCC-UC,

GT21-03PSCC-UC

GT20-15PCO, GT20-12PCO, GT20-10PCO, GT20-08PCO, GT25-05PCO,

GT21-04RPCO, GT10-20PCO

GT25-UCOV, GT25-05UCOV

GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, GT15-60STAND, GT05-

50STAND

GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, GT15-

60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77

A - 15

5. Software

(1) Software related to GOT

Abbreviations and generic terms

GT Works3

GT Designer3 Version1

GT Designer3

GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

GT Designer3 (GOT1000)

GT Simulator3

GT SoftGOT2000

GT Converter2

GT Designer2 Classic

GT Designer2

DU/WIN

(2) Software related to iQ Works

Abbreviations and generic terms iQ Works

MELSOFT Navigator

Description

SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C

Screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT2000/GOT1000 series

Screen drawing software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3

Screen drawing software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3

Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000/GOT1000/GOT900 series

Monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000 series

Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

Screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

Screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

Screen drawing software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series

Description

Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the

SW DNC-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)

( □ indicates a version.)

A - 16

(3) Other software

Abbreviations and generic terms

GX Works3

GX Works2

Controller simulator

GX Simulator3

GX Simulator2

GX Simulator

GX Developer

GX LogViewer

PX Developer

MT Works2

MT Developer

CW Configurator

MR Configurator2

MR Configurator

FR Configurator

NC Configurator2

NC Configurator

FX Configurator-FP

FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool

RT ToolBox2

MX Component

MX Sheet

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool

Description

SW □ DND-GXW3-E (-EA) type programmable controller engineering software

( □ indicates a version.)

SW □ DNC-GXW2□ type programmable controller engineering software

( □ indicates a version.)

Simulation function of GX Works3

Simulation function of GX Works2

SW □ D5C-LLT-E (-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software package

(SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions)

( □ indicates a version.)

SW □ D5C-GPPW-E (-EV)/SW □ D5F-GPPW (-V) type software package

( □ indicates a version.)

SW □ DNN-VIEWER-E type software package

( □ indicates a version.)

SW □ D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control

( □ indicates a version.)

Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2(SW □ DND-

MTW2-E)

( □ indicates a version.)

SW □ RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller

Q series

( □ indicates a version.)

C Controller module configuration and monitor tool (SW1DND-RCCPU-E)

( □ indicates a version.)

SW □ DNC-MRC2-E type servo configuration software

( □ indicates a version.)

MRZJW □ -SETUP type servo configuration software

( □ indicates a version.)

Inverter setup software (FR-SW □ -SETUP-WE)

( □ indicates a version.)

CNC parameter setting support tool (FCSB1221)

CNC parameter setting support tool

Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-

20SSC-H (SW □ D5CFXSSCE)

( □ indicates a version.)

FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

MX Component Version □ (SW □ D5C-ACT-E, SW □ D5C-ACT-EA)

( □ indicates a version.)

MX Sheet Version □ (SW □ D5C-SHEET-E, SW □ D5C-SHEET-EA)

( □ indicates a version.)

CPU module logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

A - 17

6. License key (for GT SoftGOT2000)

Abbreviations and generic terms

License key

7. Others

YASKAWA

YOKOGAWA

RKC

ALLEN-BRADLEY

CLPA

GE

HMS

LS IS

MITSUBISHI INDIA

ODVA

SCHNEIDER

SICK

SIEMENS

PLC

Control equipment

Temperature controller

Indicating controller

Controller

Abbreviations and generic terms

IAI

AZBIL

OMRON

KEYENCE

KOYO EI

JTEKT

SHARP

SHINKO

CHINO

TOSHIBA

TOSHIBA MACHINE

PANASONIC

PANASONIC IDS

HITACHI IES

HITACHI

FUJI

Description

GT27-SGTKEY-U

Description

IAI Corporation

Azbil Corporation

OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

JTEKT Corporation

Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation

Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.

Panasonic Corporation

Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

Hitachi, Ltd.

FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

YASKAWA Electric Corporation

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

CC-Link Partner Association

GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.

HMS Industrial Networks

LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.

Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.

Schneider Electric SA

SICK AG

Siemens AG

Programmable controller manufactured by each corporation

Control equipment manufactured by each corporation

Temperature controller manufactured by each corporation

Indicating controller manufactured by each corporation

Controller manufactured by each corporation

A - 18

1. OVERVIEW

1.1

GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2

1.2

Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2

1

1 - 1

1.1

GOT

The GOT is a device connected to a PLC and others to operate switches and to display lamps, data, and messages.

Install the GOT on the panel surface of a control panel or an operating panel.

Monitoring device values

Data input, switch operation

PLC GOT2000

1.2

Features

■1.

Abundant standard equipment

(1) Variety of connections with FA devices

The GOT2000 series has interfaces with various FA devices.

• GT27,GT25 : Ethernet,RS-232,RS-422/485,Extension interface

• GT23,GT21 : Ethernet,RS-232,RS-422/485

(2) SD card interface compatible with a large-capacity SDHC card allowing high-speed communication

You can use a large-capacity SDHC card allowing high-speed communication as a data storage.

• GT27,GT25,GT23, GT2104-R : equipped with the SD card unit as standard

• GT2103-P : equipped with the SD card unit as an option

(3) Connection with various peripheral devices with the USB host (GT27,GT25 Only)

You can connect the GOT to various peripheral devices with the USB host (standard equipment).

Using a USB memory, USB mouse, USB keyboard, and others improves your convenience.

■2.

Improved usability

(1) Abundant troubleshooting functions

Abundant diagnosis functions and guidance displays reduce the time required for startup or troubleshooting.

(2) Easy and simple screen creation

You can create screens easily and simply with the screen design software, GT Designer3 Version1.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

(3) Personal computer-like operation screen

The personal computer-like operation screen enables intuitive operations.

(4) Multi-touch function, gesture function

Characters can be scaled by pinch-in/out with fingers. Also, screens can be scrolled with a flick operation.

(5) Support for the vertical installation

Since the vertical installation is supported, the GOT can be installed in even a vertically oriented space.

■3.

Enhanced compatibility with Mitsubishi FA devices

The sequence program monitor function enables enhanced compatibility with Mitsubishi FA devices.

You can save programs and data of Mitsubishi FA devices (such as PLCs) to an SD card using the backup/restoration function.

■4.

Easy replacement

Since the existing project data is compatible with the GOT2000 series, you can replace an existing model with the

GOT2000 series model easily.

Additionally, since the panel cut dimensions for the GOT2000 series are the same as those for the GOT1000 series, the control panel is not required to be reworked.

■5.

LED backlight

Since the GOT adopts a long-life LED backlight, you do not have to replace the backlight.

■6.

Support for external controllers including those handling multimedia and video

Video signals can be input or output with the combination of the GOT and an extension unit for multimedia.

1 - 2

1.1 GOT

■7.

Support for abundant functions

The GOT supports abundant functions such as the recipe function, the alarm function, operation logs, and operator authentication.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

1

1.2 Features

1 - 3

1 - 4

1.2 Features

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1

Overall Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

2.2

How to Read the Model Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

2.3

System Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5

2

2 - 1

2.1

Overall Configuration

The following shows the overall configuration of the GOT2000 series.

GOT2000

SD card USB memory

External memory

Extension unit

Communication unit

Option unit

Devices for drawing, setting, and data collection

Personal computer

(Commercially available) GT Works3

Screen design software

Optional device

SD card

USB memory

(Commercially available)

Protective cover for oil

Battery

Protective sheet

Stand

Peripheral device

Barcode reader

(Commercially available)

RFID controller

(Commercially available)

USB mouse

(Commercially available)

Memory card reader/writer

(Commercially available)

2D code reader

(Commercially available)

USB keyboard

(Commercially available)

2.2

How to Read the Model Name

2.2.1

GOT model name

GT27 15 - X T B A □

Symbol Model

GT27

GT25

GT23

GT21

GT27

GT25

GT23

GT21

Symbol Screen size

15

12

10

08

05

15"

12.1"

10.4"

8.4"

5.7"

04

03

4.3" Wide

3.8"

Symbol

X

S

V

R

Resolution

XGA

SVGA

VGA

480 × 272 dots

P 320 × 128 dots or less

Symbol

T

M

Display section

TFT color

TFT monochrome

Symbol Panel color

B Black

W White

Symbol

A

Power type

100 V AC to 240 V AC

D 24 V DC

L 5 V DC

Symbol

None *1

S *1

Others

With an Ethernet interface and an RS-422/485 interface

With an RS-232 interface and an RS-422/485 interface, or with an RS-422 interface only

S2

-GF

*1

*2

With two RS-232 interfaces

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit set

* 1: For GT21 only

* 2: For GT27 and GT25 only

2 - 2

2.1 Overall Configuration

2.2.2

Option model name

■1.

Extension unit and option dedicated to the GOT2000 series

GT** - ** ****

Symbol

GT27

GT25

GT23

GT21

GT20

GT01

Model

Dedicated for GT27

Dedicated for GT27,GT25

Dedicated for GT23

Dedicated for GT21

Common for all models

Common for all models

Symbol

15

12

10

Screen size

15"

12.1"

10.4"

08

05

04

03

None

8.4"

5.7"

4.3" Wide

3.8"

Common for all sizes

■2.

Option unit for the GOT1000 series and GOT2000 series

GT** - ** ****

Symbol

GT15

GT05

Model

Common for

GT27/GT25/GT23/GT16/GT15

(Partially dedicated for GT15)

Common for

GT27/GT16/GT15

Symbol

90

80

75

70

60

50

None

Screen size

Dedicated for 15"

Dedicated for 12.1"

Dedicated for 15",12.1",10.4",8.4"

Dedicated for 10.4"

Dedicated for 8.4"

Dedicated for 5.7"

Common for all sizes

2

2.2 How to Read the Model Name

2 - 3

■3.

Communication cable for the GOT1000 series and GOT2000 series

GT09 - C*** ** ** ** - n*

Symbol

GT09

Description

Non-Mitsubishi PLC connection cable

(Commonly used for

GT27, GT25, GT23,

GT21, GT16, GT15, and GT11)

Symbol Length

06

12

0.6 m

1.2 m

30

50

100

150

200

250

3 m

5 m

10 m

15 m

20 m

25 m

300

350

30 m

35 m

Symbol

R4

R2

Symbol

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

Non-Mitsubishi manufacturer

OMRON

For YASKAWA products

For YOKOGAWA products

For HITACHI IES products

For TOSHIBA products

For SHARP products

For ALLEN-BRADLEY products

For SIEMENS PLC

For Panasonic IDS products

For FUJI FA products

For KEYENCE products

For JTEKT products

For HITACHI products

Description

Dedicated for RS-422

Dedicated for RS-232

Symbol

4

25

No. of connector pins

4-pin

25-pin

(The number of terminals for solderless or preparatory-soldered terminals.)

Symbol

P

S

T

Connector pin type of connection target

Plug (male)

Socket (female)

Solderless terminal

C Preparatory soldering

(Non-Mitsubishi PLC side)

Symbol Non-Mitsubishi manufacturer No.

When cable distinction is required for one manufacturer's products

Example) When wirings are different for each PLC type

When connection targets are different, such as servo,

inverter, and temperature controller

2 - 4

2.2 How to Read the Model Name

2.3

System Equipment

The following shows the system equipment of the GOT2000 series.

2.3.1

GOT

Classification Model Screen size

Display section, Display color

GT27

GT2715

GT2712

GT2710

GT2708

GT2715-XTBA

GT2715-XTBD

GT2712-STBA

GT2712-STBD

GT2712-STWA

GT2712-STWD

GT2710-STBA

GT2710-STBD

GT2710-VTBA

GT2710-VTBD

GT2710-VTWA

GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-STBA

GT2708-STBD

GT2708-VTBA

GT2708-VTBD

15" XGA

12.1" SVGA

10.4" SVGA

10.4" VGA

8.4" SVGA

8.4" VGA

TFT color

65536 colors

GT2705 5.7" VGA

GT25

GT23

GT2512

GT2510

GT2508

GT2310

GT2308

GT2705-VTBD

GT2512-STBA

GT2512-STBD

GT2510-VTBA

GT2510-VTBD

GT2510-VTWA

GT2510-VTWD

GT2508-VTBA

GT2508-VTBD

GT2508-VTWA

GT2508-VTWD

GT2310-VTBA

GT2310-VTBD

GT2308-VTBA

GT2308-VTBD

12.1" SVGA

10.4" VGA

8.4" VGA

10.4" VGA

8.4" VGA

TFT color

65536 colors

TFT color

65536 colors

Panel color

Black

Black

White

Black

White

Black

Black

Black

Black

White

Black

White

Black

Power

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

Remarks

Multimedia/Video/

RGB compatible

Multi-touch compatible

Multi-touch compatible

-

-

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 5

Classification

GT2104

Model

GT2104-RTBD

Screen size

4.3" Wide

[480 × 272 dots]

Display section, Display color

TFT color

65536 colors

Panel color

Black

GT2103-PMBD

GT21

GT2103

GT2103-PMBDS

GT2103-PMBDS2

3.8"

[320 × 128 dots]

TFT Monochrome

(black/white) 32 levels

Black

GT2103-PMBLS

Power

DC

DC

DC

DC

DC5V

Remarks

Ethernet,

RS-422/485

RS232

Ethernet,

RS-422/485

RS-232,

RS-422/485

RS-232,

RS-232

RS-422

(FXCPU Connection

Only)

2 - 6

2.3 System Equipment

2.3.2

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit set

Classification Model Screen size

Display section, Display color

Panel color

GT27

GT25

GT2715

GT2712

GT2710

GT2708

GT2705

GT2512

GT2510

GT2508

GT2715-XTBA-GF

GT2715-XTBD-GF

GT2712-STBA-GF

GT2712-STBD-GF

GT2712-STWA-GF

GT2712-STWD-GF

GT2710-STBA-GF

GT2710-STBD-GF

GT2710-VTBA-GF

GT2710-VTBD-GF

GT2710-VTWA-GF

GT2710-VTWD-GF

GT2708-STBA-GF

GT2708-STBD-GF

GT2708-VTBA-GF

GT2708-VTBD-GF

15" XGA

12.1" SVGA

10.4" SVGA

10.4" VGA

8.4" SVGA

8.4" VGA

GT2705-VTBD-GF 5.7" VGA

GT2512-STBA-GF

12.1" SVGA

GT2512-STBD-GF

GT2510-VTBA-GF

GT2510-VTBD-GF

GT2510-VTWA-GF

GT2510-VTWD-GF

GT2508-VTBA-GF

GT2508-VTBD-GF

GT2508-VTWA-GF

GT2508-VTWD-GF

10.4" VGA

8.4" VGA

TFT color

65536 colors

TFT color

65536 colors

Black

Black

White

Black

White

Black

Black

Black

Black

White

Black

White

Power

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

DC

AC

DC

AC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

AC

DC

Remarks

GOT

+

GT15-J71GF13-T2

GOT

+

GT15-J71GF13-T2

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 7

2.3.3

Extension unit

■1.

Communication unit

Product name

Serial communication unit

Model

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-RS4-TE

Bus connection unit

GT15-QBUS

GT15-QBUS2

GT15-ABUS

GT15-ABUS2

GT15-75QBUSL

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-75ABUSL

GT15-75ABUS2L

MELSECNET/H communication unit

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE Controller

Network communication unit

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

CC-Link communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2

GT15-J61BT13

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP

Specifications

GT

27

RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin: male) ○

Supported model

GT

25

GT

23

-

GT

21

-

RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin: female)

*1*2

RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block) *1

Can be used only when connected with temperature controllers/indicating controllers by RS-485 connection or at the GOT multi-drop connection

-

-

-

-

QBUS connection (1ch) unit standard model

QBUS connection (2ch) unit standard model

ABUS connection (1ch) unit standard model

ABUS connection (2ch) unit standard model

QBUS connection (1ch) unit slim model

*3

QBUS connection (2ch) unit slim model *3

ABUS connection (1ch) unit slim model *3

ABUS connection (2ch) unit slim model

*3

Normal station unit (optical loop)

Normal station unit (coaxial bus)

Normal station unit (optical loop)

Intelligent device station unit

Intelligent device station unit CC-Link Ver. 2 compliant

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Wireless LAN communication unit

GT25-WLAN

Adapter unit for field network communication

*4

IEEE802.11b/g/n compliant,built-in antenna,station

(client),connection to personal computer

Compliance with

Japan Radio Law *5 , FCC *6 , R&TTE *6

-

-

-

-

Serial multi-drop connection unit

GT01-RS4-M For GOT multi-drop connection ○ ○ ○

*1 May not be able to be used depending on the connection target. For details, refer to GOT2000 Series Connection Manual.

*2 Cannot be used when connected with temperature controllers or indicating controllers by RS-485 (2-wire type) connection.

*3 Cannot be used overlapping other units.

*4 The field network adapter unit can be used with the following field networks by using the Anybus CompactCom M40 network communication module manufactured by HMS.

Purchase a communication module by specifying its article number.

Communication module product name Communication module article number

ABCC-M40-DPV1 AB6910-B

ABCC-M40-DEV AB6909-B

Supported network

PROFIBUS DP

DeviceNet

*5 The product with hardware version A (manufactured in December 2013) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version A can be used only in Japan.

*6 The product with hardware version B (manufactured in October 2014) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version B or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and

Liechtenstein.

2 - 8

2.3 System Equipment

■2.

Option unit

Product name

Printer unit

Multimedia unit

Video input unit

RGB input unit

Video/RGB input unit

RGB output unit

Sound output unit

External I/O unit

SD card unit

Model

GT15-PRN

GT27-MMR-Z

GT27-V4-Z

GT27-R2

GT27-R2-Z

GT27-V4R1-Z

GT27-ROUT

GT27-ROUT-Z

GT15-SOUT

GT15-DIOR

GT15-DIO

GT21-03SDCD

Supported model

Specifications

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

USB slave (PictBridge) for printer connection, 1ch

Cable for connection between printer unit and printer (3m) included

For video input (NTSC/PAL), 1 channel, recording video/ playing video files

For video input (NTSC/PAL), 4 channels

For analog RGB input, 2 channels

For analog RGB input, 2 channels (Assembled set of

GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

For video input (NTSC/PAL), 4 channels/analog RGB, 1 channel input

For analog RGB output, 1 channel

For analog RGB output, 1 channel (Assembled set of

GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

For sound output ( φ 3.5 stereo pin jack)

For connecting an external I/O device and an operation panel

(Negative common input, source type output)

For connecting an external I/O device and an operation panel

(Positive common input, sink type output)

For mounting an SD card

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

*2

*1

*2

This unit is not usable for GT2705-V.

Only available to GT2103-P.

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 9

2.3.4

Software

■1.

Software

Product name

HMI/GOT Screen

Design Software

MELSOFT GT Works3

Model

SW1DND-GTWK3-E

SW1DND-GTWK3-EA

SW1DND-GTWK3-EAZ

FA Integrated

Engineering Software

MELSOFT iQ Works

*2*3

SW1DND-IQWK-E

License key for GT

SoftGOT2000 *4

Remote Personal

Computer Operation

Function (Ethernet)

License *5

VNC Server Function

License

*5

MES I/F Function

License

*5

GT27-SGTKEY-U

GT25-PCRAKEY

GT25-VNCSKEY

GT25-MESIFKEY

English version

English version

Description

Standard license product

Volume license product

*1

Additional license product

*1*6

Standard license product (Version1.77F or later)

USB port licence key

1 license

1 license (License for GOT remote access function)

1 license

DVD product

DVD product

*1 The desired number of licenses (2 or more) can be purchased. For details, please contact your local sales office.

*2 Volume license product and additional license product are also available. For more details, please refer to the MELSOFT iQ

Works catalog (L(NA)08232).

*3 The product includes the following software.

• System Management Software [MELSOFT Navigator]

• Programmable Controller Engineering Software [MELSOFT GX Works2]

• Motion Controller Engineering Software [MELSOFT MT Works2]

• Servo Setup Software [MELSOFT MR Configurator2]

• Inverter Setup Software [FR Configurator2]

• Screen Design Software for Graphic Operation Terminal [MELSOFT GT Works3]

• Robot Engineering Software [MELSOFT RT ToolBox2 mini]

*4 To use GT SoftGOT2000, a license key for GT SoftGOT2000 is necessary for each personal computer.

*5 1 license is required for 1 GOT unit.

*6 This product does not include the DVD-ROM. Only the license certificate with the product ID No. is issued.

2 - 10

2.3 System Equipment

2.3.5

Option

Product name

Protective sheet

*1

Model

GT27-15PSGC

GT25-12PSGC

GT25-10PSGC

GT25-08PSGC

GT25-05PSGC

GT27-15PSCC

GT25-12PSCC

GT25-10PSCC

GT25-08PSCC

GT25-05PSCC

GT21-04RPSGC-UC

GT21-03PSGC-UC

GT25-12PSCC-UC

GT25-10PSCC-UC

GT25-08PSCC-UC

GT21-04RPSCC-UC

USB environmental protection cover

Protective cover for oil

*3

Stand

GT21-03PSCC-UC

GT25-UCOV

GT25-05UCOV

GT20-15PCO

GT20-12PCO

GT20-10PCO

GT20-08PCO

GT25-05PCO

GT21-04RPCO

GT10-20PCO

GT15-90STAND

GT15-80STAND

GT15-70STAND

GT05-50STAND

Description

For 15"

For 12.1"

For 10.4"

For 8.4"

For 5.7"

For 4.3" Wide

For 3.8"

For 15"

For 12.1"

For 10.4"/8.4"

For 5.7"

For 15"

For 12.1"

For 10.4"

For 8.4"

For 5.7"

For 15"

For 12.1"

For 10.4"

For 8.4"

For 5.7"

For 4.3"

Wide

• Antiglare type

• Transparent

• With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover

• A set of 5 sheets

• Clear type

• Transparent

• With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover

• A set of 5 sheets

For 3.8"

• Antiglare type

• Transparent

• Without a hole for the USB environmental protection cover

*2

• A set of 5 sheets

For 12.1"

For 10.4"

For 8.4"

For 4.3"

Wide

For 3.8"

• Clear type

• Transparent

• Without a hole for the USB environmental protection cover *2

• A set of 5 sheets

Environmental protection cover for the USB interface on the GOT front face (for replacement)

GT

27

Supported model

GT

25

-

GT

23

-

GT

21

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 11

Product name

Memory card

Memory card adaptor

Attachment

Battery

SD card

CF card

Model

NZ1MEM-2GBSD

NZ1MEM-4GBSD

NZ1MEM-8GBSD

NZ1MEM-16GBSD

L1MEM-2GBSD

L1MEM-4GBSD

GT05-MEM-128MC

GT05-MEM-256MC

GT05-MEM-512MC

GT05-MEM-1GC

GT05-MEM-2GC

GT05-MEM-4GC

GT05-MEM-8GC

GT05-MEM-16GC

GT05-MEM-ADPC

Description

SD memory card for GOT, 2 GB

SDHC memory card for GOT, 4 GB

SDHC memory card for GOT, 8 GB

SDHC memory card for GOT, 16 GB

SD memory card for GOT, 2 GB

SDHC memory card for GOT, 4 GB

CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 128 MB

CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 256 MB

CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 512 MB

CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 1 GB

CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 2 GB

CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 4 GB

CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 8 GB

CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 16 GB

Conversion adapter from CF card for GT27-MMR-Z to memory card (TYPE II)

GT

27

Supported model

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

GT15-70ATT-98

GT15-70ATT-87

GT15-60ATT-97

GT15-60ATT-96

For 10.4"

For replacing GT168 □ , GT158 □ , A985GOT *4

For replacing A870GOT-SWS/TWS or A8GT-

70GOT-TB/TW/SB/SW

For replacing GT167 □ , GT157 □ , A97 □ GOT

For replacing A960GOT

-

-

GT15-60ATT-87

GT15-60ATT-77

For 8.4"

For replacing A870GOT-EWS, A8GT-70GOT-

EB/EW, A77GOT-EL, A77GOT-EL-S5/S3

For replacing A77GOT-CL, A77GOT-CL-S5/

S3, A77GOT-L, A77GOT-L-S5/S3

-

-

GT15-50ATT-95W

GT15-50ATT-85

For 5.7"

For replacing A956WGOT, F940WGOT

For replacing A85 □ GOT

-

-

-

-

GT11-50BAT

Battery for backup of SRAM data, clock data, and system status log data.

(For repla ceme nt)

(For repla ceme nt)

(Op tion)

*1 The while model does not have the front USB interface. It is recommended to use the products that the USB environmental protection cover area is closed.

*2 When using the product with the USB environmental protection cover area closed, the front USB interface cannot be used.

*3 Check if the protective cover for oil can be used in the actual environment before use. When using the cover, the front USB interface and human sensor cannot be used.

*4 Including the GP250 □ and GP260 □ manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation.

-

-

-

-

-

2 - 12

2.3 System Equipment

2.3.6

Cable

■1.

Cable for MITSUBISHI PLC

QCPU

Bus cable

Product name connection

Ferrite core

QCPU connection cable

GOT-to-GOT connection cable

QCPU connection cable

GOT-to-GOT connection cable

(long distance)

Bus extension connector box

Bus connection cable

Model

GT15-QC06B

GT15-QC12B

GT15-QC30B

GT15-QC50B

GT15-QC100B

GT15-QC150BS

GT15-QC200BS

GT15-QC250BS

GT15-QC300BS

GT15-QC350BS

A9GT-QCNB

GT15-QFC

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05

RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10

RS-422 conversion cable

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20

FA-CNV2402CBL

FA-CNV2405CBL

10 m

15 m

20 m

25 m

30 m

35 m

Cable length

Reco mme nded produ ct *1

0.6 m

1.2 m

3 m

5 m

Specifications

QCPU ←→ GOT

GOT ←→ GOT

For connecting the QCPU and GOT (long distance),

A9GT-QCNB is required

For connecting the GOT and

GOT (long distance)

-

-

-

-

Connect the connector box to the main base unit of PLC when connecting the QCPU and GOT (long distance).

Attach a ferrite core to the

GOT-A900 bus connection cable when an existing GOT-

A900 is replaced with a

GOT2000. (two ferrite cores/ set)

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

-

-

-

-

GT

21

-

-

-

-

0.5 m

1 m

2 m

RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

With a cable for connecting

RS-422/485 (connector) of

GOT2000 and a RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

○ ○ -

0.2 m

0.5 m

For connecting the QCPU/

L02SCPU(-P) and the RS-

422 cable (GT01-C □ R4-25P,

GT10-C □ R4-25P, GT21-

C □ R4-25P5)

For connecting the L6ADP-

R2 and the RS-422 cable

(GT01-C □ R4-25P, GT10-

C □ R4-25P, GT21-C □ R4-

25P5) [MINI-DIN 6-pin ←→

D-sub 25-pin]

○ ○ ○ ○

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 13

RS-422

Cable

Product name

QnA/A/FXCPU direct connection cable

Computer link connection cable

CC-Link (G4) connection cable

Model

GT01-C30R4-25P

GT01-C100R4-25P

GT01-C200R4-25P

GT01-C300R4-25P

GT10-C30R4-25P

GT10-C100R4-25P

GT10-C200R4-25P

GT10-C300R4-25P

Cable length

Reco mme nded produ ct

*1

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

-

-

Specifications

Supported model

GT

27

For connecting the QnA/

ACPU/FXCPU/motion controller (A series) and the

GOT

For connecting the RS-422 connector conversion cable

(FA-CNV □ CBL) and the

GOT

For connecting the serial communication module and the GOT

For connecting the peripheral connection module (AJ65BT-G4-S3) and the GOT

[D-sub 25-pin ←→ separate wire (Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

For connecting the QnA/ACPU/

FXCPU/motion controller (A series) and the GOT

For connecting the RS-422 connector conversion cable (FA-

CNV □ CBL) and the GOT

For connecting the serial communication module and the

GOT

For connecting the peripheral connection module (AJ65BT-G4-

S3) and the GOT

[D-sub 25-pin ←→ separate wire

(Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

-

GT

25

-

GT

23

-

GT

21

*3

*6

*3

2 - 14

2.3 System Equipment

RS-422

Cable

Product name

QnA/A/FXCPU direct connection cable GT21-C100R4-25P5

Computer link connection cable

CC-Link (G4) connection cable

GT21-C200R4-25P5

Computer link connection cable

FXCPU direct connection cable

FXCPU communication expansion board connection cable

Model

GT21-C30R4-25P5

GT21-C300R4-25P5

GT09-C30R4-6C

GT09-C100R4-6C

GT09-C200R4-6C

GT09-C300R4-6C

GT01-C10R4-8P

GT01-C30R4-8P

GT01-C100R4-8P

GT01-C200R4-8P

GT01-C300R4-8P

GT10-C10R4-8P

GT10-C30R4-8P

GT10-C100R4-8P

GT10-C200R4-8P

GT10-C300R4-8P

GT21-C10R4-8P5

GT21-C30R4-8P5

GT21-C100R4-8P5

GT21-C200R4-8P5

GT21-C300R4-8P5

Cable length

Reco mme nded produ ct

*1

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

1 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

30 m

1 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

1 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

-

-

-

-

Specifications

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

For connecting the QnACPU and GOT

For connecting the RS-422 connector conversion cable

(FA-CNV □ CBL) and GOT

For connecting the serial communication module and

GOT

For connecting the peripheral connection module (AJ65BT-G4-S3) and GOT

[D-sub 25-pin ←→ separate wire (Connector terminal block 5-pin)]

*GT2103-PMBD cannot be connected to Q00JCPU,

Q00CPU, or Q01CPU.

-

For connecting the serial communication module and

GOT

For connecting a Computer link module and GOT

[Separate wire ←→ D-sub 9pin]

For connecting the FXCPU and GOT

For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and GOT

[MINI-DIN 8-pin ←→ D-sub

9 pin]

For connecting the FXCPU and GOT

For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and GOT

[MINI-DIN 8-pin ←→ separate wire (Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

-

For connecting the FXCPU and GOT

For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and GOT

[MINI-DIN 8-pin and separate wire (Connector terminal block 5-pin)]

-

-

-

GT

23

-

*3

*7

*3

*7

-

GT

21

*2

*4

*2

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 15

RS-422

Cable

Product name

FXCPU direct connection cable

FXCPU communication expansion board connection cable

RS-422 connector conversion cable

Model

GT10-C10R4-8PL

GT10-C10R4-8PC

GT10-C30R4-8PC

GT10-C100R4-8PC

GT10-C200R4-8PC

GT10-C300R4-8PC

GT10-C02H-9SC

Cable length

Reco mme nded produ ct

*1

1 m

1 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

0.2 m

-

-

-

Specifications

Supported model

GT

27

For connecting the FXCPU and GOT

For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and GOT

[MINI-DIN 8-pin ←→ separate wire (Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

*This cable cannot be used for FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3UC-

D/DSS, or FX3G.

For connecting the FXCPU and GOT

For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and GOT

[MINI-DIN 8-pin ←→

Connector terminal block 9pin]

For connecting a PLC and

GOT

[D-sub 9-pin ←→ separate wire (Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

-

-

-

GT

25

-

-

-

GT

23

GT

21

*4

*4

*3

2 - 16

2.3 System Equipment

Product name

Q/LCPU direct connection cable

Q/LCPU direct connection cable

Model

GT01-C30R2-6P

GT10-C30R2-6P

RS-232 cable

FXCPU communication function extension board connection cable

FXCPU communication special adapter connection cable

GT01-C30R2-9S

FXCPU communication special adapter connection cable

GT01-C30R2-25P

Cable length

Reco mme nded produ ct

*1

3 m

3 m

3m

3 m

-

-

-

-

Specifications

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

For connecting the Q/LCPU and GOT

For connecting L6ADP-R2 and GOT/personal computer

(GT SoftGOT2000)

[MINI-DIN 6-pin ←→ D-sub

9 pin]

For connecting the Q/LCPU and GOT

[MINI-DIN 6-pin ←→ separate wire (Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

For connecting multiple

GOTs

[MINI-DIN 6-pin ←→ separate wire (Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and GOT/ personal computer (GT

SoftGOT2000)

For connecting an FXCPU communication special adapter and GOT/personal computer (GT

SoftGOT2000)

[D-sub 9-pin ←→ D-sub 9 pin]

For connecting an FXCPU communication special adapter and GOT/personal computer (GT

SoftGOT2000)

[D-sub 25-pin ←→ D-sub 9 pin]

-

-

-

-

GT

23

GT

21

*5

*8

*6

*5

*5

*8

*5

*8

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 17

2 - 18

RS-232 cable

Computer link connection cable

CC-Link (G4) connection cable

Conversion cable for connecting

External I/O unit

Analog RGB cable

USB cable

Product name

Computer link connection cable

RS-232 connector conversion cable

Data transfer cable

Data transfer cable

Printer connection cable

Extended USB waterproof cable

Model

GT09-C30R2-9P

GT09-C30R2-25P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P

GT01-C30R2-6P

GT15-C03HTB

GT15-C50VG

GT09-C30USB-5P

GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

Cable length

Reco mme nded produ ct

*1

3 m

3 m

0.2 m

3 m

0.3 m

5 m

3 m

1 m

-

-

-

Specifications

Supported model

GT

27

For connecting the serial communication module and

GOT

For connecting a Computer link module and GOT

For connecting the peripheral connection module (AJ65BT-R2N) and

GOT

[D-sub 9-pin ←→ D-sub 9 pin]

For connecting the serial communication module and

GOT

For connecting a Computer link module and GOT

[D-sub 25-pin ←→ D-sub 9 pin]

For connecting a PLC and

GOT

For connecting multiple

GOTs

For connecting a barcode reader, RFID, or serial printer and a GOT

[D-sub 9-pin ←→ MINI-DIN

6-pin]

For connecting the GOT and the personal computer (This cable is used only for the FA transparent function. Do not use this cable to transfer screen or OS data.)

[MINI-DIN 6-pin ←→ D-sub

9-pin]

For connecting an External I/

O unit (GT15-DIO) and external I/O interface unit

(A8GT-C05TK, A8GT-

C30TB, user-fabricated cable) for GOT-A900

For connecting an external monitor/personal computer/ vision sensor and GOT

For connecting a personal computer (Screen creation software) and GOT

For connecting a personal computer (GT

SoftGOT2000) and QnU/L/

FXCPU

For connecting a PictBridgecompatible printer and printer unit (GT15-PRN)

[USB-A ←→ USB Mini-B]

Use this cable for extracting the USB port of a GOT to the surface of a control panel

-

-

-

GT

25

-

-

-

-

GT

23

-

-

-

-

-

GT

21

*5

*8

*5

*8

*5

*5

-

-

*9

2.3 System Equipment

*5

*6

*7

*8

*9

*2

*3

*4

*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL □ , FA-CNV240 □ CBL are developed by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Company Limited and sold through your local sales office.

The other products listed are developed by Mitsubishi Electric Systems & Service Co., LTD. and sold through your local sales office.

This cable is usable for GT2104-RMBD, GT2103-PMBD.

This cable is usable for GT2104-RTBD, GT2103-PMBDS.

This cable is usable for GT2104-RTBD, GT2103-PMBLS.

For GT2103-PMBLS, use a 3 m or shorter cable.

This cable is usable for GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS2.

This cable is usable for GT2104-RTBD, GT2103-PMBDS2.

This cable is usable with the RS-422 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-9SC.

This cable is usable with the RS-232 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-6PT9P.

This cable is not usable for the printer connection.

■2.

Cable for OMRON PLC

Product name Model

Cable length

Specifications

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

RS-232 cable

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20101-9P

GT09-C30R20102-25S

GT09-C30R20103-25P

GT09-C30R21101-6P

3 m

3 m

3 m

3 m

For connecting an OMRON PLC/serial communication module/communication board and GOT

For connecting an OMRON connection cable and GOT

For connecting an OMRON rack type host link unit and GOT

For connecting a KEYENCE PLC and

GOT

For connecting a KEYENCE multicommunication unit and GOT

○ ○

*1

RS-422 cable

Cable length

For connecting an OMRON PLC/serial communication module/serial communication board and GOT

For connecting an OMRON rack type host link unit and GOT

For connecting an OMRON communication board and GOT

*1

*2

This cable can be used if connected with the RS-232 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-6PT9P.

This cable can be used if connected with the RS-422 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-9SC.

■3.

Cable for KEYENCE PLC

Product name

GT09-C30R40101-9P

GT09-C100R40101-9P

GT09-C200R40101-9P

GT09-C300R40101-9P

GT09-C30R40102-9P

GT09-C100R40102-9P

GT09-C200R40102-9P

GT09-C300R40102-9P

GT09-C30R40103-5T

GT09-C100R40103-5T

GT09-C200R40103-5T

GT09-C300R40103-5T

Model

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

Specifications

○ ○

*2

○ ○

*2

○ ○

*2

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

○ ○

*1

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R21102-9S

GT09-C30R21103-3T

GT09-C30R41101-5T

GT09-C100R41101-5T

GT09-C200R41101-5T

GT09-C300R41101-5T

3 m

3 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

For connecting a KEYENCE multicommunication unit and GOT

○ ○ ○ ○ *2

*1

*2

This cable can be used if connected with the RS-232 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-6PT9P.

This cable can be used if connected with the RS-422 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-9SC.

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 19

2

■4.

Cable for SHARP PLC

Product name

RS-232 cable

RS-422 cable

Model

GT09-C30R20601-15P

GT09-C30R20602-15P

GT09-C30R40601-15P

GT09-C100R40601-15P

GT09-C200R40601-15P

GT09-C300R40601-15P

GT09-C30R40602-15P

GT09-C100R40602-15P

GT09-C200R40602-15P

GT09-C300R40602-15P

GT09-C30R40603-6T

GT09-C100R40603-6T

GT09-C200R40603-6T

GT09-C300R40603-6T

Cable length

Specifications

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

3 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

For connecting a SHARP PLC and GOT

For connecting a SHARP PLC and GOT

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

-

-

■5.

Cable for JTEKT PLC

Product name

RS-232 cable

RS-422 cable

Model

GT09-C30R21201-25P

GT09-C30R41201-6C

GT09-C100R41201-6C

GT09-C200R41201-6C

GT09-C300R41201-6C

Cable length

Specifications

3 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30m

For connecting a JTEKT PLC and GOT

For connecting a JTEKT PLC and GOT

GT

27

Supported model

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

-

○ ○ ○ -

■6.

Cable for SHINKO indicating controller

Product name

RS-232 cable

Model

GT09-C30R21401-4T

Cable length

Specifications

3 m

For connecting a SHINKO indicating controller and GOT

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

○ ○ ○ -

■7.

Cable for TOSHIBA PLC

Product name Model

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20501-9P

GT09-C30R20502-15P

Cable length

Specifications

3 m

3 m

For connecting a TOSHIBA PLC and

GOT

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

○ ○ ○ -

2 - 20

2.3 System Equipment

Product name

RS-422 cable

Model

GT09-C30R40501-15P

GT09-C100R40501-15P

GT09-C200R40501-15P

GT09-C300R40501-15P

GT09-C30R40502-6C

GT09-C100R40502-6C

GT09-C200R40502-6C

GT09-C300R40502-6C

GT09-C30R40503-15P

GT09-C100R40503-15P

GT09-C200R40503-15P

GT09-C300R40503-15P

■8.

Cable for HITACHI IES PLC

Product name Model

RS-232 cable

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R20401-15P

GT09-C30R20402-15P

GT09-C30R40401-7T

GT09-C100R40401-7T

GT09-C200R40401-7T

GT09-C300R40401-7T

■9.

Cable for HITACHI PLC

Product name Model

RS-232 cable

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R21301-9S

GT09-C30R41301-9S

GT09-C100R41301-9S

GT09-C200R41301-9S

GT09-C300R41301-9S

Cable length

Specifications

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

For connecting a TOSHIBA PLC and

GOT

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

○ ○ ○ -

Cable length

Specifications

3 m

3 m

For connecting a HITACHI IES PLC/ intelligent serial port module and GOT

For connecting a HITACHI IES PLC and

GOT

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

For connecting a HITACHI IES intelligent serial port module and GOT

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

-

-

-

Cable length

Specifications

3 m

For connecting a HITACHI communication module and GOT

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

For connecting a HITACHI PLC/ communication module and GOT

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

○ ○ ○ -

○ ○ ○ -

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 21

■10.

Cable for FUJI FA PLC

Product name

RS-232 cable

RS-422 cable

Model

GT09-C30R21003-25P

GT09-C30R41001-6T

GT09-C100R41001-6T

GT09-C200R41001-6T

GT09-C300R41001-6T

Cable length

Specifications

3 m

For connecting a FUJI FA RS-232C interface card/RS-232C interface capsule/RS-485 interface capsule/ general-purpose interface module and

GOT

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

For connecting a FUJI FA RS-232C interface capsule/485 interface capsule/ general-purpose interface module and

GOT

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

-

-

■11.

Cable for Panasonic IDS PLC

Product name Model

Cable length

Specifications

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20901-25P

GT09-C30R20902-9P

GT09-C30R20903-9P

GT09-C30R20904-3C

3 m

3 m

3 m

3 m

For connecting a Panasonic IDS RS422/

RS232C conversion adapter and GOT

For connecting a Panasonic IDS PLC/ computer communication unit and GOT

For connecting a Panasonic IDS PLC and GOT

*1 This cable can be used if connected with the RS-232 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-6PT9P.

■12.

Cable for YASKAWA PLC

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

○ ○

*1

○ ○

*1

○ ○

*1

Product name Model

Cable length

Specifications

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20201-9P

GT09-C30R20202-15P

GT09-C30R20203-9P

GT09-C30R20204-14P

3 m

3 m

3 m

3 m

For connecting a YASKAWA PLC and

GOT

GT09-C30R20205-25P 3 m

For connecting a YASKAWA MEMOBUS module and GOT

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R40201-9P

GT09-C100R40201-9P

GT09-C200R40201-9P

GT09-C300R40201-9P

GT09-C30R40202-14P

GT09-C100R40202-14P

GT09-C200R40202-14P

GT09-C300R40202-14P

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

For connecting a YASKAWA MEMOBUS module and GOT

For connecting a YASKAWA PLC and

GOT

*1 This cable is usable with the RS-232 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-6PT9P

*2 This cable is usable with the RS-422 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-9SC.

○ ○ *1

○ *1

○ *2

○ ○ *2

2 - 22

2.3 System Equipment

■13.

Cable for YOKOGAWA PLC and temperature controller

Product name

RS-232 cable

RS-422 cable

Model

GT09-C30R20301-9P

GT09-C30R20302-9P

GT09-C30R20304-9S

GT09-C30R20305-9S

GT09-C30R40301-6T

GT09-C100R40301-6T

GT09-C200R40301-6T

GT09-C300R40301-6T

GT09-C30R40302-6T

GT09-C100R40302-6T

GT09-C200R40302-6T

GT09-C300R40302-6T

GT09-C30R40303-6T

GT09-C100R40303-6T

GT09-C200R40303-6T

GT09-C300R40303-6T

GT09-C30R40304-6T

GT09-C100R40304-6T

GT09-C200R40304-6T

GT09-C300R40304-6T

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

3 m

10 m

20 m

30 m

Cable length

3 m

3 m

3 m

3 m

Specifications

For connecting a YOKOGAWA CPU port/

D-sub 9-pin conversion cable and GOT

For connecting a YOKOGAWA PC link module and GOT

For connection a YOKOGAWA converter

(ML2□ ) and GOT

For connecting a YOKOGAWA PLC and

GOT

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

-

-

-

-

For connecting a YOKOGAWA PC link module and GOT

For connecting a YOKOGAWA temperature controller (GREEN series) and GOT

For connecting a YOKOGAWA temperature controller (UT2000 series) and GOT

-

-

-

■14.

ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC cables

Product name Model

Cable length

Specifications

RS-232 cable

*1

GT09-C30R20701-9S 3 m

For connecting an ALLEN-BRADLEY

PLC and GOT

This cable is usable with the RS-232 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-6PT9P

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

○ ○ ○

*1

■15.

Cable for SIEMENS PLC

Product name

RS-232 cable

*1

Model

Cable length

Specifications

GT09-C30R20801-9S 3 m

For connecting a SIEMENS HMI

Adapter and GOT

This cable can be used if connected with the RS-232 connector conversion cable GT10-C02H-6PT9P.

Supported model

GT

27

GT

25

GT

23

GT

21

○ ○ ○

*1

2

2.3 System Equipment

2 - 23

2.3.7

Others

■1.

Peripheral device

Of the following peripheral devices, you can use some models that we validated.

For the validated models expect the SD cards, refer to the following Technical News.

➠ List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series (GOT-A-0064)

For the validated models of the SD cards, refer to the following Technical News.

➠ Information of valid Non-Mitsubishi SD cards applicable for GOT2000 series(GOT-A-0065)

For Technical News, go to the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website.

http://www.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/fa/

Product name Overview

Barcode reader

2D code reader

RFID controller

USB mouse

USB keyboard

Memory card reader/writer

SD card

USB memory

RS-232 connection

RS-232 connection

RS-232 connection

Hub

Wireless LAN access point

Video camera

Speaker

Commercially available product

2 - 24

2.3 System Equipment

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.1

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

3.2

Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5

3.3

Specifications of Power Supply Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29

3.4

Battery Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35

3

3 - 1

3.1

General Specifications

The following shows the general specifications of the GOT.

3.1.1

GT27,GT25

Item

Operating ambient temperature

*1

Storage ambient temperature

Operating ambient humidity

Storage ambient humidity

Vibration resistance

Shock resistant

Operating atmosphere *6

Specifications

0 °C to 55 °C

*2

Compliant with

JIS B3502 and

IEC61131-2

Under intermittent vibration

Under continuous vibration

-20°C to 60°C

10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Sweep count

5 to 8.4 Hz

8.4 to 150 Hz

-

9.8 m/s

2

3.5 mm

-

10 times in each X, Y, or Z direction

5 to 8.4 Hz

8.4 to 150 Hz

-

4.9 m/s

2

1.75 mm

-

Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC61131-2 (147 m/s

2

(15G),3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

Operating altitude *3

Installation location

Overvoltage category *4

Pollution degree

*5

Cooling method

Grounding

2000 m or less

Inside control panel

II or less

2 or less

Self-cooling

Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less.

If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel.

*1 The operating ambient temperature indicates the temperature inside the enclosure of the control panel to which the GOT is installed.

*2 When any of the following units is mounted, the maximum operating ambient temperature must be 5°C lower than the one described in the general specifications.

• GT27 :

Multimedia unit (GT27-MMR-Z)

MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25,GT15-J71BR13)

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)

• GT25 :

MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25,GT15-J71BR13)

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)

Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at altitude 0 m.

*3

Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Air purging by applying pressure to the control panel may create clearance between the surface sheet and the touch panel. This may cause the touch panel to be not sensitive enough or the sheet to come off. the screen, making you difficult to use the touch panel, or the sheet may come off.

*4 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises.

Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.

The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

*5 This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected depending on the conditions.

*6 Some models have ANSI/ISA12.12.01 approval for use in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations. For the details, go to the

MITSUBISHI ELECTLIC FA Global Website (http://www.MitsubishiElectric.com/fa/).

3 - 2

3.1 General Specifications

3.1.2

GT23

Item

Operating ambient temperature

*1

Storage ambient temperature

Operating ambient humidity

Storage ambient humidity

Vibration resistance

Shock resistant

Operating atmosphere

Operating altitude

Installation location

Overvoltage category

Pollution degree

Cooling method

Grounding

*3

*5

*4

*1

*2

*3

*4

*5

*6

Specifications

0 °C to 55 °C

Compliant with

JIS B3502 and

IEC61131-2

-20 °C to 60 °C

10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

*2

Under intermittent vibration

Under continuous vibration

10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing *2

Frequency

5 to 8.4 Hz

Acceleration

-

8.4 to 150 Hz

5 to 8.4Hz

8.4 to 150 Hz

9.8 m/s

-

4.9 m/s

2

2

Half amplitude Sweep count

3.5 mm

-

10 times in each X, Y, or Z direction

1.75 mm

-

Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC61131-2 (147 m/s 2 (15G),3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

2000 m or less

Inside control panel

II or less

2 or less

Self-cooling

Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less.

If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel.

*6

The operating ambient temperature indicates the temperature inside the enclosure of the control panel to which the GOT is installed.

If the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C, the absolute humidity must not exceed 90% at 40 °C.

Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at altitude 0 m.

Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Air purging by applying pressure to the control panel may create clearance between the surface sheet and the touch panel. This may cause the touch panel to be not sensitive enough or the sheet to come off. the screen, making you difficult to use the touch panel, or the sheet may come off.

This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises.

Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.

The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected depending on the conditions.

DC5V type is not required ground.

3

3.1 General Specifications

3 - 3

3.1.3

GT21

Item

Operating ambient temperature

*1

Storage ambient temperature

Operating ambient humidity

Storage ambient humidity

Vibration resistance

Shock resistant

Operating atmosphere

Specifications

0°C to 55°C (Horizontal installation), 0°C to 50°C (Vertical installation)

Compliant with

JIS B3502 and

IEC61131-2

-20°C to 60°C

10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

*2

Under intermittent vibration

Under continuous vibration

10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing *2

Frequency

5 to 8.4 Hz

Acceleration

-

8.4 to 150 Hz

5 to 8.4 Hz

8.4 to 150 Hz

9.8 m/s

-

4.9 m/s

2

2

Half amplitude Sweep count

3.5 mm

-

10 times in each X, Y, or Z direction

1.75 mm

-

Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC61131-2 (147 m/s 2 (15G), 3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

Operating altitude *3

Installation location

Overvoltage category *4

Pollution degree

*5

Cooling method

Grounding

2000 m or less

Inside control panel

II or less

2 or less

Self-cooling

Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less.

If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel.

*1 The operating ambient temperature indicates the temperature inside the enclosure of the control panel to which the GOT is installed.

*2 If the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C, the absolute humidity must not exceed 90% at 40 °C.

*3 Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at altitude 0 m.

Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Air purging by applying pressure to the control panel may create clearance between the surface sheet and the touch panel. This may cause the touch panel to be not sensitive enough or the sheet to come off.

*4 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises.

Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.

The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

*5 This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected depending on the conditions.

3 - 4

3.1 General Specifications

3.2

Performance Specifications

The following shows the performance specifications of the GOT.

3.2.1

GT27

■1.

GT2715-X

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Touch panel

*3

Backlight life *4

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Human sensor

Life

Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Specifications

GT2715-XTBA,GT2715-XTBD

TFT color LCD

15"

XGA: 1024×768 dots

304.1(12.0)(W)×228.1(8.98)(H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 64 chars. × 48 lines (2-byte)

12-dot standard font: 85 chars. × 64 lines (2-byte)

65536 colors

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25°C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Up to two points

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

1 m

Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4 °C or higher

Memory for storage (ROM): 57MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128MB

Battery

Built-in interface

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

USB (Device)

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

2 channel (front face, rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel (front face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB) SD card

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

For installing an option unit

For installing a communication unit

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 5

3

Item

Buzzer output

POWER LED

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2715-XTBA,GT2715-XTBD

Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

2 colors (blue and orange)

Outside the enclosure: IP67

*5

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

397(15.63)(W)×300(11.81)(H)×60(D) mm(inch)

383.5(15.10)(W)×282.5(11.12)(H) mm(inch)

4.5(9.9) kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

• Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a touch switch near the touched points may operate unexpectedly.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

3 - 6

3.2 Performance Specifications

■2.

GT2712-S

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Human sensor

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

Built-in interface

Buzzer output

POWER LED

USB (Device)

SD card

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Specifications

GT2712-STBA, GT2712-STBD GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STWD

TFT color LCD

12.1"

SVGA: 800 × 600 dots

246(9.685) (W) × 184.5(7.264) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 50 characters × 37 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 66 characters × 50 lines (two-byte characters)

65536 colors

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25°C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Up to two points

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

1 m

Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4 °C or higher

Memory for storage (ROM): 57MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128MB

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

2 channel (front face, rear face) 1 channel (rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

For installing an option unit

For installing a communication unit

Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

2 colors (blue and orange)

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 7

3

Item

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2712-STBA, GT2712-STBD GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STWD

Outside the enclosure: IP67

*5

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

316 (12.44)(W) × 246(9.69) (H) × 52(2.05) (D) mm(inch)

302(11.89) (W) × 228(8.98) (H) mm(inch)

2.4(5.3) kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

3 - 8

3.2 Performance Specifications

■3.

GT2710-S, GT2710-V

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Human sensor

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Life

GT2710-STBA

GT2710-STBD

Specifications

GT2710-VTBA

GT2710-VTBD

TFT color LCD

10.4"

SVGA: 800 × 600 dots VGA: 640 × 480 dots

211.2(8.315) (W) × 158.4(6.236) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 50 characters × 37 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 66 characters × 50 lines (two-byte characters)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters × 30 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 53 characters × 40 lines (two-byte characters)

65536 colors

GT2710-VTWA

GT2710-VTWD

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Up to two points

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

-

-

Memory for storage (ROM): 57MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128MB

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

3

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 9

Built-in interface

Item

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

USB (Device)

GT2710-STBA

GT2710-STBD

Specifications

GT2710-VTBA

GT2710-VTBD

GT2710-VTWA

GT2710-VTWD

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

2 channel (front face, rear face) 1 channel (rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB) SD card

Extension interface

Buzzer output

POWER LED

Productive structure

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

For installing an option unit

For installing a communication unit

Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

2 colors (blue and orange)

Outside the enclosure: IP67

*5

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

303 (11.93)(W) × 218(8.58) (H) × 52 (2.05)(D) mm(inch)

289(11.38) (W) × 200 (7.87)(H) mm(inch)

2.1(4.6)kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

3 - 10

3.2 Performance Specifications

■4.

GT2708-S, GT2708-V

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Human sensor

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Specifications

GT2708-STBA, GT2708-STBD GT2708-VTBA, GT2708-VTBD

TFT color LCD

8.4"

SVGA: 800 × 600 dots VGA: 640 × 480 dots

170.9(6.728) (W) × 128.2(5.047) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 50 characters × 37 lines

(two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 66 characters × 50 lines

(two-byte characters)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters × 30 lines

65536 colors

(two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 53 characters × 40 lines

(two-byte characters)

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Up to two points

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

-

-

Memory for storage (ROM): 57MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128MB

Battery

Built-in interface

Buzzer output

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

USB (Device)

SD card

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

2 channel (front face, rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel (front face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

For installing an option unit

For installing a communication unit

Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 11

3

Item

POWER LED

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2708-STBA, GT2708-STBD GT2708-VTBA, GT2708-VTBD

2 colors (blue and orange)

Outside the enclosure: IP67

*5

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

241 (9.49)(W) × 194 (7.64)(H) × 52(2.05) (D) mm(inch)

227(8.94)(W) × 176(6.93) (H) mm(inch)

1.5(3.3)kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

3 - 12

3.2 Performance Specifications

■5.

GT2705-V

Item

Display section

*1*2

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Human sensor

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

Built-in interface

Buzzer output

POWER LED

USB (Device)

SD card

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Specifications

GT2705-VTBD

TFT color LCD

5.7"

VGA: 640 × 480 dots

115.2(4.535) (W) × 86.4(3.402) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters × 30 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 53 characters × 40 lines (two-byte characters)

65536 colors

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Up to two points

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

-

-

Memory for storage (ROM): 32MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80MB

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

2 channel (front face, rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel (front face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

-

For installing a communication unit

Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

2 colors (blue and orange)

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 13

3

Item

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2705-VTBD

Outside the enclosure: IP67

*5

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

167 (6.57)(W) × 139 (5.47)(H) × 60(2.36) (D) mm(inch)

153(6.02)(W) × 121(4.76) (H) mm(inch)

1.0(2.2)kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.130L or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*6 When multiple devices such as extension units, a barcode reader, and an RFID controller are connected, the total amount of current must be within the maximum amount of current supplied by the GOT.

For the amount of current required for an extension unit, a barcode reader, or an RFID controller, and the maximum amount of current supplied by the GOT, refer to the following.

11.4 Calculating consumed current of GT2705-V

3 - 14

3.2 Performance Specifications

3.2.2

GT25

■1.

GT2512-S

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel *3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Human sensor

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

Built-in interface

Buzzer output

USB (Device)

SD card

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Specifications

GT2512-STBA, GT2512-STBD

TFT color LCD

12.1"

SVGA: 800 × 600 dots

246(9.685) (W) × 184.5(7.264) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 50 characters × 37 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 66 characters × 50 lines (two-byte characters)

65536 colors

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

-

-

Memory for storage (ROM): 32MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80MB

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

2 channels (Front face, rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel (Front face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

-

For installing a communication unit

Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 15

3

Item

POWER LED

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (Excluding installation fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2512-STBA, GT2512-STBD

2 colors (blue and orange)

Front: IP67

*6

In control panel: IP2X

316(12.44) (W) × 246(9.69) (H) × 52(2.05) (D) mm(inch)

302(11.89) (W) × 228(8.98) (H) mm(inch)

2.4(5.3) kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.112C or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

• Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a touch switch near the touched points may operate unexpectedly.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

3 - 16

3.2 Performance Specifications

■2.

GT2510-V

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Human sensor

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

Built-in interface

Buzzer output

POWER LED

USB (Device)

SD card

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Specifications

GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTBD GT2510-VTWA, GT2510-VTWD

TFT color LCD

10.4"

VGA: 640 × 480 dots

211.2(8.315) (W) × 158.4(6.236) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters × 30 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 53 characters × 40 lines (two-byte characters)

65536 colors

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Not available

*5

(Only 1 point can be touched.)

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

-

-

Memory for storage (ROM): 32MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80MB

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

2 channel (front face, rear face) 1 channel (rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

-

For installing a communication unit

Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

2 colors (blue and orange)

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 17

3

Item

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTBD GT2510-VTWA, GT2510-VTWD

Outside the enclosure: IP67

*6

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

303 (11.93)(W) × 218(8.58) (H) × 52 (2.05)(D) mm(inch)

289(11.38) (W) × 200 (7.87)(H) mm(inch)

2.1(4.6)kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 When 2 points on the touch panel are pressed simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid pressing 2 points on the touch panel simultaneously.

*6 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

3 - 18

3.2 Performance Specifications

■3.

GT2508-V

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Human sensor

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

Built-in interface USB (Device)

Buzzer output

POWER LED

Productive structure

SD card

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Specifications

GT2508-VTBA, GT2508-VTBD GT2508-VTWA, GT2508-VTWD

TFT color LCD

8.4"

VGA: 640 × 480 dots

170.9(6.728) (W) × 128.2(5.047) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters × 30 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 53 characters × 40 lines (two-byte characters)

65536 colors

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Not available

*5

(Only 1 point can be touched.)s

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

-

-

Memory for storage (ROM): 32MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80MB

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

2 channel (front face, rear face) 1 channel (rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

-

For installing a communication unit

Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

2 colors (blue and orange)

Outside the enclosure: IP67 *6 Inside the enclosure: IP2X

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 19

3

Item

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

GT2508-VTBA, GT2508-VTBD

Specifications

241 (9.49)(W) × 194 (7.64)(H) × 52(2.05) (D) mm(inch)

227(8.94)(W) × 176(6.93) (H) mm(inch)

1.5(3.3)kg(lb)

GT2508-VTWA, GT2508-VTWD

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 When 2 points on the touch panel are pressed simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid pressing 2 points on the touch panel simultaneously.

*6 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

3 - 20

3.2 Performance Specifications

3.2.3

GT23

■1.

GT2310-V

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

Built-in interface

USB (Host)

USB (Device)

SD card

Buzzer output

POWER LED

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2310-VTBA,GT2310-VTBD

TFT color LCD

10.4"

VGA: 640 × 480 dots

211.2(8.315) (W) × 158.4(6.236) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters × 30 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 53 characters × 40 lines (two-byte characters)

65536 colors

16 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 50000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Simultaneous press is prohibited.

*5 (Only one point can be touched.)

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Memory for storage (ROM): 9MB Memory for operation (RAM): 9MB

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

1 channel

Maximum transfer rate: Full-Speed 12 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel

Maximum transfer rate: Full-Speed 12 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Single tone (tone length adjustable)

2 colors (blue and orange)

Outside the enclosure: IP67

*6

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

303(11.93) (W) × 218(8.58) (H) × 56(2.20) (D) mm(inch)

289(11.38) (W) × 200(7.87) (H) mm(inch)

1.9(4.2) kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 21

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 If you touch two or more points on the touch panel simultaneously and a switch is placed between the two points, the switch may be activated. Do not touch two or more points on the touch panel simultaneously.

*6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

3 - 22

3.2 Performance Specifications

■2.

GT2308-V

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness

Adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*4

Touch panel

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Built-in interface

Buzzer output

POWER LED

Item

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

USB (Device)

SD card

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (excluding a fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2308-VTBA, GT2308-VTBD

TFT color LCD

8.4"

VGA: 640 × 480 dots

170.9(6.728) (W) × 128.2(5.047) (H) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters × 30 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 53 characters × 40 lines (two-byte characters)

65536 colors

16 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 50000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Simultaneous press is prohibited.

*5

(Only one point can be touched.)

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Memory for storage (ROM): 9MB Memory for operation (RAM): 9MB

100000 times

±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: Dsub 9-pin (male)

1 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: Dsub 9-pin (female)

1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

1 channel

Maximum transfer rate: Full-Speed 12 Mbps Connector shape: USB-A

1 channel

Maximum transfer rate: Full-Speed 12 Mbps Connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Single tone (tone length adjustable)

2 colors (blue and orange)

Outside the enclosure: IP67 *6 Inside the enclosure: IP2X

241(9.49) (W) × 194(7.64) (H) × 56(2.20) (D) mm(inch)

227(8.94) (W) × 176(6.93) (H) mm(inch)

1.5 (3.3)kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

3

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 23

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*5 If you touch two or more points on the touch panel simultaneously and a switch is placed between the two points, the switch may be activated. Do not touch two or more points on the touch panel simultaneously.

*6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

3 - 24

3.2 Performance Specifications

3.2.4

GT21

■1.

GT2104-R

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness adjustment

Backlight

Backlight life

*3

Touch panel *4

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Human sensor

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

USB (Host)

Built-in interface

USB (Device)

SD card

*6

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Built-in interface

Buzzer output

Side interface

Specifications

GT2104-RTBD

TFT color LCD

4.3" Wide

480 × 272 dots

95.0 (3.74)(W) × 53.8 (H)(2.12) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 30 characters × 17 rows (Two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 40 characters × 22 rows (Two-byte characters)

65536 colors

32 levels

LED (Not replaceable)

Approx. 50000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

-

-

Memory for storage (ROM): 9 MB

100000 times

±45 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 °C)

1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block

1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block

1 channel, data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (Modular jack)

-

-

1 channel

Maximum transfer rate: Full-Speed 12 Mbps, connector shape: USB Mini-B

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

-

-

-

Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 25

3

Item

POWER LED

Productive structure

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (Excluding installation fitting)

Compatible software package

Specifications

GT2104-RTBD

-

Front: IP67

*7

In control panel: IP2X

128(5.04) (W) × 102(4.02) (H) × 40(1.57) (D) mm(inch)

118(4.65) (W) × 92(3.63) (H) mm(inch)

0.4(0.88) kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.122C or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*4 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a touch switch near the touched points may operate unexpectedly.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

■2.

GT2103-P

Item

Display device

Screen size

Resolution

Display size

Display section

*1*2

Number of displayed characters

Display color

Brightness adjustment

Backlight

Touch panel

User memory capacity

*4

Human sensor

Backlight life

*3

Type

Key size

Simultaneous press

Life

Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory capacity

Life (number of write times)

GT2103-PMBD

Specifications

GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBDS2

TFT monochrome LCD

3.8"

GT2103-PMBLS

320 × 128 dots

89.0 (3.51)(W) × 35.6 (H)(1.41) mm(inch)

16-dot standard font: 20 characters × 8 rows (Two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 26 characters × 10 rows (Two-byte characters)

Monochrome (black/white) 32 shade grayscale

32 levels

5-color LED (White, green, pink, orange, red) (Not replaceable)

Approx. 50000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25 °C, display intensity: 50%)

Analog resistive film

Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

-

-

Memory for storage (ROM): 3 MB

100000 times

3 - 26

3.2 Performance Specifications

Item

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

Built-in interface

RS-232 (rear face)

RS-232 (side face)

RS-422/485

RS-422

Ethernet

USB (Host)

USB (Device)

Buzzer output

POWER LED

Productive structure

SD card

*6

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

GT2103-PMBD

Specifications

GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBDS2

-

-

GT2103-PMBLS

-

-

-

1 channel, transmission speed:

115200, 57600, 38400,

19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape:

MINI-DIN 6-pin

(female)

-

1 channel, transmission speed:

115200, 57600, 38400,

19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape:

MINI-DIN 6-pin

(female)

1 channel, transmission speed:

115200, 57600, 38400,

19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: 9pin connector terminal block

-

-

1 channel, transmission speed:

115200, 57600, 38400,

19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: 5pin connector terminal block

1 channel, transmission speed:

115200, 57600, 38400,

19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: 9pin connector terminal block

-

-

1 channel, transmission speed:

115200, 57600, 38400,

19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: 9pin connector terminal block

1 channel, data transfer method:

10BASE-T, 100BASE-

TX

Connector shape: RJ-

45 (Modular jack)

-

-

-

1 channel

Maximum transfer rate: Full-Speed 12 Mbps, connector shape: USB Mini-B

-

1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB) -

-

3

-

-

Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

-

Front: IP67 *7 In control panel: IP2X

3.2 Performance Specifications

3 - 27

Item

External dimensions

Panel cut dimensions

Weight (Excluding installation fitting)

Compatible software package

GT2103-PMBD

113(4.45) (W) ×

74(2.92) (H) × 32(1.26)

(D) mm(inch)

GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

Specifications

GT2103-PMBDS

113(4.45) (W) × 74(2.92) (H) × 27(1.07) (D) mm(inch)

GT2103-PMBDS2

*8

105(4.14) (W) × 66(2.60) (H) mm(inch)

0.2(0.44) kg(lb)

GT2103-PMBLS

113(4.45) (W) ×

74(2.92) (H) × 27(1.07)

(D) mm(inch)

0.18(0.40) kg(lb)

GT Works3 Version1.119L or later

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight.

*4 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin

•Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a touch switch near the touched points may operate unexpectedly.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 The SD card unit (GT21-03SDCD), sold separately, needs to be mounted.

*7 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

*8

The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

The dimension when the SD card unit (GT21-03SDCD) is mounted is 113 (4.45)(W) × 74(2.92) (H) × 32(1.26) (D) mm(inch).

3 - 28

3.2 Performance Specifications

3.3

Specifications of Power Supply Section

The following shows the power supply specifications of the GOT.

Operation at instantaneous power failure

If an instantaneous power failure occurs in the power supply and continues for more than the permissible period, the GOT may be reset.

Make sure to power on the unit more than 5 seconds after power-off.

3.3.1

GT27

■1.

GT27 Input power supply 100 V AC to 240 V AC

Item

GT2715-XTBA

Specifications

GT2712-STBA

GT2712-STWA

GT2710-STBA

GT2710-VTBA

GT2710-VTWA

Power supply voltage

Power supply frequency

Maximum apparent power

Power consumption

Under the maximum load

Main unit

Main unit

(Backlight OFF)

140 VA

51 W or less

25 W

10 W

100 V AC to 240 V AC (+10%, -15%)

50 Hz/60 Hz (±5%)

100 VA

44 W or less

19 W

10 W

41 W or less

17 W

10 W

Inrush current

40 A or less (3 ms, ambient temperature:

25 °C, under the maximum load)

GT2708-STBA

GT2708-VTBA

41 W or less

15 W

10 W

60 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 °C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

20 ms or less (100 V AC or more)

Noise immunity

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Noise voltage: 1500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 μ s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz.

1500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M Ω or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size

Applicable solderless terminal

Applicable tightening torque

(Terminal block terminal screw)

0.75 mm 2 to 2 mm 2

Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

0.5 N·m to 0.8 N·m

3

3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3 - 29

■2.

GT27 Input power supply 24 V DC

Item

Power supply voltage

Power consumption

Under the maximum load

Main unit

Main unit

(Backlight OFF)

Inrush current

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

Noise immunity

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Applicable wire size

Applicable solderless terminal

Applicable tightening torque

(Terminal block terminal screw)

GT2715-XTBD

48 W or less

23 W

8 W

GT2712-STBD

GT2712-STWD

Specifications

GT2710-STBD

GT2710-VTBD

GT2710-VTWD

24 V DC (+25%, -20%)

GT2708-STBD

GT2708-VTBD

45 W or less

18 W

8 W

42 W or less

15 W

8 W

39 W or less

13 W

8 W

GT2705-VTBD

30 W or less

7 W

5 W

5 A or less (20 ms, ambient temperature: 25 °C, under the maximum load)

10 ms or less

69A or less (1 ms, ambient temperature: 25

°C, under the maximum load)

Noise voltage: 500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 μ s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz.

350 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M Ω or more by an insulation resistance tester

0.75 mm

2

to 2 mm

2

Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

0.5 N·m to 0.8 N·m

3 - 30

3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3.3.2

GT25

■1.

GT25 Input power supply 100 V AC to 240 V AC

Item

Power supply voltage

Power supply frequency

Maximum apparent power

Power consumption

Under the maximum load

Main unit

Main unit

(Backlight OFF)

GT2512-STBA

80 VA

35 W or less

14 W

7 W

Specifications

GT2510-VTBA

GT2510-VTWA

100 V AC to 240 V AC (+10%, -15%)

50 Hz/60 Hz (±5%)

80 VA

34 W or less

12 W

7 W

Inrush current

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

20 ms or less (100 V AC or more)

GT2508-VTBA

GT2508-VTWA

70 VA

31 W or less

11 W

7 W

60 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 °C, under the maximum load)

Noise immunity

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Applicable wire size

Noise voltage: 1500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 μ s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz.

1500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M Ω or more by an insulation resistance tester

0.75 mm

2

to 2 mm

2

Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A Applicable solderless terminal

Applicable tightening torque

(Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 N·m to 0.8 N·m

■2.

GT25 Input power supply 24 V DC

Item

Power supply voltage

Under the maximum load

Power consumption

Main unit

Main unit

(Backlight OFF)

Inrush current

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

Noise immunity

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Applicable wire size

Applicable solderless terminal

Applicable tightening torque

(Terminal block terminal screw)

GT2512-STBD

37 W or less

Specifications

GT2510-VTBD

GT2510-VTWD

24 V DC (+25%, -20%)

33 W or less

GT2508-VTBD

GT2508-VTWD

31 W or less

13 W

6 W

10 W

6 W

8 W

6 W

5 A or less (20 ms, ambient temperature: 25 °C, under the maximum load)

10 ms or less

Noise voltage: 500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 μ s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz.

350 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M Ω or more by an insulation resistance tester

0.75 mm

2

to 2 mm

2

Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

0.5 N·m to 0.8 N·m

3

3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3 - 31

3.3.3

GT23

■1.

GT23 Input power supply 100 V AC to 240 V AC

Item

Power supply voltage

Power supply frequency

Specifications

GT2310-VTBA

100 V AC to 240 V AC (+10%, -15%)

GT2308-VTBA

44 VA (under the maximum load)

50 Hz/60 Hz (±5%)

30 VA (under the maximum load) Maximum apparent power

Power consumption

Under the maximum load

Main unit

Main unit

(Backlight OFF)

18 W or less

15 W

8 W

11 W or less

9 W

6 W

Inrush current

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

40 A or less (4 ms, ambient temperature: 25 °C, under the maximum load)

20 ms or less (100 V AC or more)

Noise immunity

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Noise voltage: 1500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 μ s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz.

1500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M Ω or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size

Applicable solderless terminal

Applicable tightening torque

(Terminal block terminal screw)

0.75 mm 2 to 2 mm 2

Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

0.5 N·m to 0.8 N·m

3 - 32

3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

■2.

GT23 Input power supply 24 V DC

Item

Power supply voltage

Power consumption

Under the maximum load

Main unit

Main unit

(Backlight OFF)

Inrush current

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

Noise immunity

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Applicable wire size

Applicable solderless terminal

Applicable tightening torque

(Terminal block terminal screw)

Specifications

GT2310-VTBD GT2308-VTBD

24 V DC (+25%, -20%)

16 W or less

13 W

11 W or less

8 W

7 W 6 W

40 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 °C, under the maximum load)

10 ms or less

Noise voltage: 500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 μ s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz.

350 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M Ω or more by an insulation resistance tester

0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2

Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

0.5 N·m to 0.8 N·m

3

3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3 - 33

3.3.4

GT21

■1.

GT21 Input power supply 24 V DC/5 V DC

Item

Power supply voltage

GT2104-RTBD GT2103-PMBD

Specifications

GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBDS2 GT2103-PMBLS

24 V DC (+10%, -15%)

5 V DC (+5%, -

5%)

Power from the sequencer

Power consumption

Under the maximum load

Backlight OFF

4.4 W or less 2.6 W or less

2.0 W

1.9 W or less

1.3 W

2.2 W or less

1.6 W

1.1 W or less

0.7 W

Inrush current

2.9 W

18 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25

°C, under the maximum load)

30 A or less (1 ms, ambient temperature: 25 °C, under the maximum load)

-

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

5 ms or less -

Noise immunity

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, noise width: 1 μ s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 30 Hz to 100 Hz.

500 V AC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth -

500 V DC across power supply terminals and earth, 10 M Ω or more by an insulation resistance tester

-

Applicable wire size

Applicable solderless terminal

Single wiring: Single wire 0.14 to 1.5 mm 2 (AWG26 to AWG16)

Stranded wire 0.14 to 1.0 mm 2 (AWG26 to AWG16)

Rod terminal with an insulation sleeve 0.25 to 0.5 mm

2

(AWG24 to AWG20)

Double wiring: Single wire 0.14 to 0.5 mm

2

(AWG26 to AWG20)

Stranded wire 0.14 to 0.2 mm

2

(AWG26 to AWG24)

AI 0.25-6BU (AWG24), AI 0.34-6TQ (AWG22), AI 0.5-6WH (AWG20) (manufactured by PHOENIX

CONTACT)

Swage: CRIMPFOXZA3 (manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT)

Applicable tightening torque

(Terminal block terminal screw)

0.22 to 0.25 N·m

3 - 34

3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3.4

Battery Specifications

■1.

Applicable battery

The following batteries are applicable for GOT2000 series.

Model name

GT11-50BAT

Description

Battery for backup of SRAM data, clock data, and system status log data.

*1 GT2103-P does not have a built-in battery.

■2.

Battery specifications

The following describes the battery specifications for the GOT2000 series.

Item

Model name

Type

Initial voltage

Nominal current

Storage life

Total power stoppage time

Lithium content

Specifications

GT11-50BAT

Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery

3.0V

550mAh

Approx.5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25°C)

■3.

Battery life

0.00015kg

Target GOT

GT27,GT25,GT23,GT21

*1

3

For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the following.

9.4 ■ 2. Handling of batteries and devices with built-in batteries in EU member states

■3.

Battery life

Life span of the battery set in the GOT is shown below.

Battery life

Operating ambient temperature of 0° to 25°C

Operating ambient temperature of 25° to 45°C

Operating ambient temperature of 45° to 55°C

3 years 4 years 3 years

Data backup time after detection of battery voltage low

*1

14 days

*1 In the following conditions, the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off.(As for GT23, the data backup time is 30 seconds.)

• The battery connector is disconnected.

• The battery connector is disconnected.

The battery connector is disconnected.

(1) Battery life reference: Approx.4 years in actual use (Ambient temperature: 25°C)

Battery replacement time reference: 3 to 4 years

Calculate the natural discharge amount of the battery, as necessary.

(2) Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility.

Refer to the following for the details of battery status display.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

3.4 Battery Specifications

3 - 35

3 - 36

3.4 Battery Specifications

4. PART NAMES AND SETTINGS

4.1

GT27, GT25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2

4.2

GT23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6

4.3

GT21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8

4

4 - 1

4.1

GT27, GT25

■1.

GT2715-X

1)2)

6)

5)

3)4)

7)

20)

7)

7)

7) 8) 7) 9)

10)

11)

12)

7)

13)

14)

15)

16)

7) 19) 18) 17) 7)

24) 23) 22)

■2.

GT2712-S, GT2512-S

1)2)

21)

6)

5)

3)4)

20)

7)

7)

8) 7) 9)

10)

11)

12)

13)

14)

15)

16)

19) 18) 17) 7)

25) 24) 23) 22) 21)

4 - 2

4.1 GT27, GT25

■3.

GT2710-S, GT2710-V, GT2510-V

1)2)

5)

3)4)

20)

7)

7) 8) 7) 9)

10)

11)

12)

13)

14)

15)

16)

19) 18) 17) 7)

25) 24) 23) 22) 21)

■4.

GT2708-S, GT2708-V, GT2508-V

1)2)

5)

3)4)

20)

7)

7)

8) 7) 9)

10)

11)12)13)

14)

15)

19) 18) 17) 7)

16) 25) 24) 23) 22) 21)

4

4.1 GT27, GT25

4 - 3

■5.

GT2705-V

5)

3)4)

1)2)

24) 23) 22) 21)

14)

20)

7)

19) 7)

7) 9)

8)

10)

11)12)13)

15)

7) 17)

4 - 4

4.1 GT27, GT25

■6.

Part names and settings OF GT27

3)

4)

5)

8)

9)

6)

7)

10)

11)

12)

13)

14)

15)

16)

17)

18)

22)

23)

24)

19)

20)

21)

1)

No.

2)

25)

Display section

Touch panel

POWER LED

Human sensor

Reset switch

SD card cover

Battery

Side interface

Name

USB interface (Host/front)

USB interface (Device/front)

Unit installation fitting

S.MODE switch

SD card access LED

SD card interface

USB interface (Host/back)

Cable clamp mounting hole

Terminating resistor setting switch

(inside the cover)

Auxiliary extension interface

Extension interface

Vertical installation arrow mark

Power terminal

Ethernet interface

RS-232 interface

RS-422/485 interface

USB interface (Device/back)

Description

Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

For connecting a USB mouse and a USB keyboard, transferring data, and storing data (Connector shape; TYPE-A)

Applicable models : GT2715-XTBA/D, GT2712-STBA/D, GT2710-STBA/D,

GT2710-VTBA/D, GT2708-STBA/D, GT2708-VTBA/D, GT2705-VTBD, GT2512-

STBA/D, GT2510-VTBA/D, GT2508-VTBA/D

For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B)

Applicable models : GT2715-XTBA/D, GT2712-STBA/D, GT2710-STBA/D,

GT2710-VTBA/D, GT2708-STBA/D, GT2708-VTBA/D, GT2705-VTBD, GT2512-

STBA/D, GT2510-VTBA/D, GT2508-VTBA/D

Lit in blue : Power is properly supplied.

Lit in orange : Screen saving

Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure

Not lit : Power is not supplied.

Detects human movement. (GT2715,GT2712 only)

Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

Hardware reset switch

Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

ON: SD card installed

Blink: SD card accessed

OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

For installing an SD card

Has the function to switch the access to the SD card between enabled and disabled states.

When the cover is opened: Access prohibited

When the cover is closed: Access allowed

Space for housing the battery

For installing a communication unit

For connecting a USB mouse and a USB keyboard, transferring data, and storing data (Connector shape; TYPE-A)

Cable clamp mounting hole as a precaution against a disconnection of the USB cable (Recommended product: RSG-130-V0 of KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES

CO.,LTD.)

Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial setting (unused))

For installing an option unit

Applicable models : GT2715-XTBA/D, GT2712-STBA/D, GT2710-STBA/D,

GT2710-VTBA/D, GT2708-STBA/D, GT2708-VTBA/D

For installing a communication unit or an option unit

For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

Power input terminal, LG terminal (except GT2705-V), FG terminal

For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack))

For communication with a controller (Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male))

For communication with a controller (Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female))

For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B)

Applicable models : GT2712-STWA/D, GT2710-VTWA/D, GT2510-VTWA/D,

GT2508-VTWA/D

4

4.1 GT27, GT25

4 - 5

4.2

GT23

■1.

GT2310-V, GT2308-V

Example) GT2310-VTBA

1)2)

3)

14)

4)

4) 5) 4) 6)

7)

8)

9)

13) 12) 4)

10)

11)

18) 17) 16) 15)

4 - 6

4.2 GT23

■2.

Part names and settings

12)

13)

14)

15)

16)

17)

18)

1)

No.

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

10)

11)

Display section

Touch panel

POWER LED

S.MODE switch

SD card cover

Name

Unit installation fitting

SD card access LED

SD card interface

USB interface (Host)

USB interface (Device)

Cable clamp mounting hole

Terminating resistor setting switch

(inside the cover)

Battery

Vertical installation mark

Power terminal

Ethernet interface

RS-232 interface

RS-422/485 interface

Description

Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

Lit in blue : Power is properly supplied.

Lit in orange : Screen saving

Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure

Not lit : Power is not supplied.

Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

ON: SD card installed

Blink: SD card accessed

OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

For installing an SD card

Has the function to switch the access to the SD card between enabled and disabled states.

When the cover is opened: Access prohibited

When the cover is closed: Access allowed

For connecting a USB mouse and a USB keyboard, transferring data, and storing data (Connector shape; TYPE-A)

For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B)

Cable clamp mounting hole as a precaution against a disconnection of the USB cable (Recommended product: RSG-130-V0 of KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES

CO.,LTD.)

Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial setting (unused))

Space for housing the battery

When using the GOT with the vertical display, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal

For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer

(Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack))

For communication with a controller (Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male))

For communication with a controller (Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female))

4

4.2 GT23

4 - 7

4.3

GT21

■1.

GT2104-RTBD

1)2)

■2.

GT2103-PMBD

11)

1)2)

9) 13)

8)

3)

6)

10) 4) 14)

8)

6)

3)

9)

10) 15)

12)

■3.

GT2103-PMBDS

1)2)

11)

8)

6)

4)

9)

10) 15)

■4.

GT2103-PMBDS2

1)2)

11)

8)

5)

4)

9)

15)

11)

4 - 8

4.3 GT21

■5.

GT2103-PMBLS

1)2)

7)

9)

11)

■6.

Part names and settings

1)

No.

2)

3)

4)

5)

10)

11)

12)

8)

9)

6)

7)

13)

14)

15)

Display section

Touch panel

Name

Ethernet interface

RS-232 interface (Rear face)

RS-232 interface (Side face)

RS-422/485 interface

RS-422 interface

Power supply terminal

USB interface (Device)

Terminating resistor setting switch

Installation fitting

SD card interface

SD card access LED

Battery

SD card unit connector (inside the cover)

Description

Displays the utility and the user-created screen

For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer

(Connector shape: RJ-45 (Modular jack))

For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (FA transparent function)

With a 9-pin connector terminal block or 6-pin MINI-DIN connector

For connecting multiple GOTs, a barcode reader, an RFID, or a serial printer

For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Female

MINI-DIN 6-pin)

For connecting multiple GOTs, a barcode reader, an RFID, or a serial printer

For communicating with a controller (9-pin or 5-pin connector terminal block)

For communicating with a controller (9-pin connector terminal block)

Power supply input terminal, FG terminal

For transferring data and storing data (Connector shape: Mini-B)

Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port among

330 Ω , OPEN, and 110 Ω (Initial setting (330 Ω ))

For fixing the GOT to the control panel

For SD card installed

ON: SD card accessed

OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

Space for housing the battery

For mounting the SD card unit

4

4.3 GT21

4 - 9

4 - 10

4.3 GT21

5. EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW

VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE

5.1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

5.2

EMC Directive Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4

5.3

Low Voltage Directive Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19

5

5 - 1

5.1

Overview

For the products sold in European countries, the conformance to the EMC Directive, which is one of the European

Directives, has been a legal obligation since 1996.

In addition, conformance to the Low Voltage Directive, another European Directive, has also been a legal obligation since

1997.

Manufacturers, who recognize that their products comply with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, must declare that their products comply with the Directives and put a CE mark on the products.

■1.

Sales representative in Europe

The sales representative in Europe is as shown below.

Company name: Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV

Address: Gothaer strase 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany

5.1.1

Conforming standards in the EMC Directive

The GOT complies with the following standards in the EMC Directive.

Applied standard

Test standard Test details

EN61131-2

: 2007

CISPR16-2-3

Radiated noise

*1

CISPR16-2-1

Conducted noise

*1

IEC61000-4-2

Electrostatic immunity *1

IEC61000-4-3

Radiated electromagnetic field, amplitude modulation *1

IEC61000-4-4

Fast transient burst noise *1

IEC61000-4-5

Surge immunity *1

IEC61000-4-6

Conducted RF immunity *1

IEC61000-4-8

Power supply frequency magnetic field immunity

Standard value

Test for measuring electromagnetic emissions from the product

Test for measuring electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power cables

• 30 MHz to 230 MHz

QP: 30 dB μ V/m (measured at 30 m) *2*3

• 230MHz to 1000MHz

QP: 37 dB μ V/m (measured at 30 m) *2*3

• 150kHz to 500kHz

QP: 79dB,Mean: 66dB

*2

• 500kHz to 30MHz

QP: 73dB,Mean: 60dB

*2

Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment

• Contact discharge: ±4 kV

• Aerial discharge: ±8 kV

Immunity test in which an electric field is applied to the product

Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power cables and the signal lines

Immunity test in which lightening surge is applied to the product

80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 10 V/m

1.4GHz to 2GHz: 3V/m

2.0GHz to 2.7GHz: 1V/m

(80% amplitude modulation at 1 kHz)

Power cable: 2 kV

Digital I/O (24V or higher): 1kV

Digital I/O (less than 24 V): 250 V or higher

Analog I/O (signal lines): 250 V or higher

• AC power type

Power cable (between cable and ground): ±2 kV

Power cable (between cables): ±1 kV

Data communication port: ±1 kV

• DC power type

Power cable (between cable and ground): ±0.5kV

Power cable (between cables):

±0.5kV

Data communication port: ±1 kV

Immunity test in which a noise inducted on the power cable and the signal lines is applied

Test for checking normal operations under the circumstance exposed to the ferromagnetic field noise of the power supply frequency (50/60 Hz)

Power cable: 10V

Data communication port: 10 V

30 A/m

5 - 2

5.1 Overview

Applied standard

Test standard Test details Standard value

EN61131-2

: 2007

*1

*2

*3

IEC61000-4-11

Instantaneous power failure and voltage dips immunity

Test for checking normal operations at instantaneous power failure

• AC power type

0.5 cycle 0% (Interval 1 second to 10 seconds)

250/300 cycle 0%

10/12 cycle 40%

25/30 cycle 70%

The GOT is an open type device (designed to be integrated in equipment).

Make sure to install the GOT on a control panel.

This test item is conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on a control panel and combined with the MITSUBISHI

PLC.

QP: Quasi-peak value, Mean: Average value

This test item is conducted in the following conditions.

• 30 MHz to 230 MHz

QP: 40 dB μ V/m (measured at 10 m)

• 230MHz to 1000MHz

QP: 47 dB μ V/m (measured at 10 m)

5.1.2

Conforming standards in the Low Voltage Directive

The GOT complies with the following standards in the Low Voltage Directive.

• EN61131-2: Programmable controllers - Equipment requirements and tests

• EN60950-1: Information technology equipment - Safety

5

5.1 Overview

5 - 3

5.2

EMC Directive Requirements

The EMC Directive requires the following.

• Strong electromagnetic waves are not emitted to the outside.: Emission (Electromagnetic interference)

• The product is not affected by the electromagnetic waves from the outside.: Immunity (Electromagnetic sensitivity)

To comply with the EMC Directive, this section explains the precautions for configuring equipment integrating the GOT.

The data described herein are produced with our best, based on the regulation requirements and standards obtained by

Mitsubishi. However, the data do not guarantee that the whole equipment produced according to the data comply with the above directive.

The manufacturer of the equipment must determine the method to comply with the EMC Directive and conformance to the directive.

5.2.1

Installing the GOT on the control panel

The GOT is an open type device (designed to be integrated in equipment).

Make sure to install the GOT in a control panel.

This restriction ensures safety and also has a large effect of suppressing noise generated from the GOT by using the control panel.

■1.

Control panel

• The control panel must be conductive.

• When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts, do not coat the plate and bolt surfaces so that they contact each other.

Connect the door and the box using a thick grounding cable to ensure the low impedance under high frequency.

• To ensure electric conductivity in the large area as much as possible between an inner plate and the control panel, do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and the control panel.

• Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable to ensure the low impedance under high frequency.

• The diameter of cable holes on the control panel must be 10 cm or less.

If the diameter of the hole is 10 cm or more, radio waves may leak.

To reduce the chance of radio waves leaking out, ensure that the space between the control panel and its door is as small as possible.

Pasting the following EMI gasket directly on the painted surface seals the space, reducing the leak of electric waves.

Manufacturer Series name

KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

RFSG series (Recommended Product) 0587-34-3651

Contact

Our test has been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37 dB max. and 30 dB mean (measured by 3m method with 30 to 300 MHz).

■2.

Connection of power and ground cables

Ground the GOT and connect power supply cables as shown below.

(1) Wiring the ground cable

Provide a ground point near the GOT. Short-circuit the line ground terminal (LG terminal) and the frame ground terminal (FG terminal) of the GOT, and ground them with the thickest and shortest cable as possible.

(2) Ground cable length

The ground cable length must be 30 cm or shorter.

The LG and FG terminals pass the noise generated in the PLC system to the ground.

Therefore, ensure an impedance as low as possible.

Since the ground cables relieve the noise, the cables themselves carry a large noise.

Thus, short wiring prevents the cable from acting as an antenna.

(A long conductor is an antenna radiating noise more efficiently.)

(3) Treatment of the power cable and the ground cable

Twist the ground cable led from the ground point with the power cable.

Twisting with the ground cable relieves more noise from the power cable to the ground.

When a noise filter is installed to the power cable, twisting the power cable and the ground cable may not be required.

5 - 4

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5.2.2

Installing a noise filter (power supply line filter)

A noise filter is a part to effectively reduce conducted noise.

Except some models, installation of a noise filter to the power supply lines is not necessary. However, installing the noise filter can reduce conducted noise.

The noise filter is effective to reduce conducted noise in the band of 10 MHz or less.

Use a noise filter equivalent to the following noise filters (double π -type filters).

Model Manufacturer Rated current Rated voltage

FN343-3/05

FN660-6/06

RSHN-2003

SCHAFFNER

SCHAFFNER

TDK

3A

6A

3A

250V

■1.

Precautions

The following shows the precautions for installing a noise filter.

(1) Prohibition of bundling cables

Do not bundle the input and output cables of the noise filter.

Bundling the cables inducts the noise from the output-side cable into the input-side cable where noise has been eliminated by the noise filter.

Wire the input and output cables separately.

Bundling the input and output cables inducts noise.

Input side

(power supply side)

Bundling

Input side

(power supply side)

5

Induction

Filter Filter

Output side

(device side)

Output side

(device side)

(2) Grounding the noise filter

Connect the ground terminal of the noise filter to the control panel with a short cable as much as possible

(approximately 10 cm).

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5 - 5

5.2.3

System configuration

You can also check the EMC Directive compliance status of the GOT2000 series at the Mitsubishi Electric Factory

Automation Global Website.

For the latest information, go to the Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation Global Website.

http://www.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/fa/

■1.

GOT

Use the following GOTs having a CE mark on the rating plate.

For how to check the hardware version of the GOT, refer to the following.

11.2 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

Product name Model

○ : Compliant ×: Not compliant

Hardware version (Manufacture year and month)

EMC Directive

GT2715

GT2712

GT2710

GT2708

GT2705

GT2512

GT2510

GT2508

GT2310

GT2308

GT2104

GT2705-VTBD

GT2512-STBA

GT2512-STBD

GT2510-VTBA

GT2510-VTBD

GT2510-VTWA

GT2510-VTWD

GT2508-VTBA

GT2508-VTBD

GT2508-VTWA

GT2508-VTWD

GT2310-VTBA

GT2310-VTBD

GT2308-VTBA

GT2308-VTBD

GT2104-RTBD

GT2715-XTBA

GT2715-XTBD

GT2712-STBA

GT2712-STBD

GT2712-STWA

GT2712-STWD

GT2710-STBA

GT2710-STBD

GT2710-VTBA

GT2710-VTBD

GT2710-VTWA

GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-STBA

GT2708-STBD

GT2708-VTBA

GT2708-VTBD

Version A or later (April 2014)

Version A or later (August 2013)

Version A or later (April 2015)

Version A or later (October 2014)

Version A or later (April 2014)

Version A or later (August 2013)

Version B or later (March 2015)

5 - 6

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

Product name Model

Hardware version (Manufacture year and month)

EMC Directive

GT2103

GT2103-PMBD

GT2103-PMBDS

GT2103-PMBDS2

GT2103-PMBLS

Version B or later (October 2014)

Version B or later (April 2015)

■2.

Connection type

The following table lists the connection types compliant with the EMC Directive.

Connection type *1

Ethernet connection

Direct CPU connection

Computer link connection

Bus connection

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

GOT multi-drop connection

Other connections

*2

(Connection with non-Mitsubishi PLC, microcomputer, inverter, temperature controller, servo amplifier, CNC, and MODBUS equipment)

GT27

×

GT25

×

○ : Compliant ×: Not compliant

GT23

×

×

×

×

×

×

GT21

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

*1

*2

For the details of each connection type, refer to the following manual.

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 compatible for a controller used

When connecting the GOT to other controllers such as a non-Mitsubishi PLC, fabricate connection cables and configure the system following the EMC Directive specifications.

■ 10. Non-Mitsubishi PLC, microcomputer, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, MODBUS/RTU, and

MODBUS/TCP connections

5

Connected devices

When connecting the GOT to a non-Mitsubishi PLC, refer to the manual about the EMC Directive compliance of the connected device (such as a PLC and a microcomputer).

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5 - 7

■3.

Communication unit

To comply with the EMC Directive, use the following communication units.

When any other than the following communication units is used, the GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive.

Connection type

Ethernet connection

Direct CPU connection

Computer link connection

Bus connection

Communication unit

GOT Ethernet interface

GOT RS-232 interface

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GOT RS-232 interface

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-QBUS

GT15-QBUS2

GT15-ABUS

GT15-ABUS2

GT15-75QBUSL

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-75ABUSL

GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

Hardware version (Manufacture year and month)

-

-

-

Version D or later (January 2006)

-

-

Version D or later (January 2006)

Version D or later (October 2005)

Version C or later (October 2005)

Version G or later (March 2005)

Version C or later (September 2006)

MELSECNET/H connection

(PLC to PLC network)

CC-Link IE Controller

Network connection

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

CC-Link connection

(Intelligent device station)

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2

GT15-J61BT13

Version A or later (December 2007)

Version A or later (April 2011)

Version C or later (September 2006)

Non-Mitsubishi PLC connection

GOT RS-232 interface

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

-

-

Version D or later (January 2006)

Microcomputer connection

(Ethernet)

GOT Ethernet interface -

Microcomputer connection

(Serial)

Temperature controller connection

Inverter connection

Servo amplifier connection

GOT RS-232 interface

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GOT RS-232 interface

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-RS4-TE

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS4-9S

GOT RS-232 interface

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (January 2006)

-

-

-

-

Version D or later (January 2006)

-

Version D or later (January 2006)

-

-

Version D or later (January 2006)

5 - 8

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

Connection type

CNC connection

MODBUS/RTU connection

MODBUS/TCP connection

Communication unit

GOT RS-232 interface

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J61BT13

GOT Ethernet interface

GOT RS-232 interface

GOT RS-422/485 interface

GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S

GOT Ethernet interface

Hardware version (Manufacture year and month)

-

-

Version D or later (January 2006)

Version C or later (September 2006)

-

-

-

Version D or later (January 2006)

-

■4.

Option unit

To comply with the EMC Directive, use the following option units.

When any other than the following option units is used, the GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive.

Product name Model

Hardware version (Manufacture year and month)

Version A or later (August 2013) Multimedia unit

Video/RGB input unit

Video input unit

GT27-MMR-Z

GT27-V4R1-Z

GT27-V4-Z

GT27-R2

Version A or later (August 2013),

GT2715: Version B or later (April 2014) *1

Version A or later (April 2015)

RGB input unit

GT27-R2-Z

Version A or later (August 2013),

GT2715: Version B or later (April 2014) *1

Version A or later (April 2015)

RGB output unit

GT27-ROUT

Printer unit

Sound output unit

External I/O unit

SD card unit

GT27-ROUT-Z

GT15-PRN

GT15-SOUT

GT15-DIO

GT15-DIOR

GT21-03SDCD

Version A or later (August 2013)

Version B or later (Feb 2006)

Version B or later (May 2007)

Version B or later (May 2007)

Version A or later (July 2008)

- (October 2014)

*1 To use the unit on GT2715, the hardware version of the supplied GT16M-V4R1-Z/GT16M-V4-Z/GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000 must also be B or later.

5

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5 - 9

■5.

Cable

(1) MELSECNET/H (coaxial cable), and video connections

Use a double shielded coaxial cable.

The 5C-2V connector plug is applicable to the double shielded coaxial cable.

Connect the 5C-2V connector plug to the coaxial cable inside the double shielded coaxial cable.

Ground the shielded part outside the double shielded coaxial cable as shown in the following figure.

Double-shielded coaxial cable

Mitsubishi cable: 5C-2V-CCY

Enlarged view of cable

Sheath

Sheath

Grounding

Internal conductor Insulation material

External conductor

External conductor

(Grounding)

(2) CC-Link IE Field Network connection

Use the following cable dedicated to the CC-Link IE Field Network.

Manufacturer

Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. SC-E5EW-S □ M

Model

(3) Other connections

For the details of the cables used, refer to the following manual.

➠ GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 compatible for a controller used

Fabricating cables

To comply with the EMC Directive, fabricate cables (including user-created cables).

For how to fabricate a cable, refer to the following.

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 compatible for a controller used

5 - 10

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5.2.4

Connection of power cables and ground cables

Carry out wiring and connect the power and ground cables according to the following instruction.

By the different wiring or connection method, the system may not comply with EMC Directive.

■1.

Wiring method

As shown in the figure below, connect the power cable and the ground cable, and then attach a ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330, manufactured by TDK Corporation) within the specified range.

GT23 does not need ferrite cores.

Make sure to ground the LG cable and FG cable.

For connection of power cables and ground cables, refer to the following.

5.2.1 ■2. Connection of power and ground cables

GT2705-VTBD does not have the LG ground terminal.

(1) 100 V AC to 240 V AC GOT power supply section (GT27,GT25,GT23 Only)

INPUT

100-240VAC

(LG) (FG)

5

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

(2) 24 V DC GOT power supply section (GT27,GT25,GT23 Only)

INPUT

24VDC

− + (LG) (FG)

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5 - 11

5.2.5

Fabricating a connection cable

Fabricate the cables used for the GOT by the methods as shown in this section.

The fabrication requires a ferrite core, cable clamp, and cable shielding materials.

The following products have passed the Mitsubishi EMC Directive compliance test.

• ZCAT3035-1330 ferrite core (TDK Corporation)

• AD75CK-type cable clamp (Mitsubishi Electric Corporation)

• Zipper tubing SHNJ type (Zippertubing (Japan),Ltd)

■1.

Ethernet connection

(1) Ethernet cable

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

• Connecting to the Ethernet interface of the GOT

GOT side PLC/personal computer side

230 or less

(9.06)

40

(1.57)

40

(1.57)

• Connecting to the multimedia unit (GT27-MMR-Z)

GOT side

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

400 or less

(9.06)

Unit: mm (inch)

Personal computer side

120 or less

(4.72)

230 or less

(9.06)

40 (1.57)

■2.

Direct CPU connection

(1) RS-232 cable and RS-422 cable

Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

Ferrite Core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

120 or less

(4.72)

Unit: mm (inch)

PLC side

100 or less

(3.94)

100 or less

(3.94)

Unit : mm (inch)

■3.

Computer link connection

(1) RS-232 cable and RS-422 cable

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield sections for grounding.The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

GOT side PLC CPU side

230 or less 40

(9.06) (1.57)

40

230 or less

(1.57) (9.06)

Unit: mm (inch)

5 - 12

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

■4.

Bus connection

(1) GT15-QC □ B and GT15-QC □ BS

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield sections for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

GOT side PLC/GOT side

360 or less

(14.17)

40

(1.57)

40

(1.57)

360 or less

(14.17)

Unit: mm (inch)

(2) GT15-C □ BS

Step 1.

Cut the ground cables from both ends of the cable to the length as shown in the figure below.

Step 2.

Install ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below, and insert the ground cables through the ferrite cores.

Step 3.

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield sections for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

GOT side

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

PLC/GOT side

5

360 or less

(14.17)

40

(1.57)

Ground cables

(280 (11.02))

40

(1.57)

60 or less

(2.36)

360 or less

(14.17)

Unit: mm (inch)

(3) Other bus connection cables

Step 1.

Wrap the cable shielding material around the cable, and pull out the braided cables for grounding from the cable shielding material with the length as shown in the figure below.

Step 2.

Install ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below, and insert the braided cable for grounding at the PLC side through the ferrite core.

GOT side

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

PLC side

80

(3.15)

40 or less

(1.57)

Cable shielding material

Grounding braided wire

(200 (7.87))

Grounding braided wire

(50(1.97))

80

(3.15)

40 or less

(1.57)

Unit: mm (inch)

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5 - 13

■5.

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) connection

(1) Coaxial cable

Step 1.

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose outer braided shield for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

Step 2.

Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

GOT side

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330) PLC side

130 or less

(5.12)

230 or less

(9.06)

40

(1.57)

40

(1.57)

130 or less

(5.12)

400 or less

(15.75)

Unit: mm (inch)

(2) Fiber-optic cable

Fabricating a cable is not required.

■6.

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

Step 1.

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

Step 2.

Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

GOT side Controller side

120 or less

(4.72)

230 or less

(9.06)

40

(1.57)

40

(1.57)

400 or less

(15.75)

Unit: mm (inch)

5 - 14

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

■7.

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

Step 1.

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

Step 2.

Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

• CC-Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and PLC

GOT side

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

PLC side

130

(5.12)

230 or less

(9.06)

40

(1.57)

40

(1.57)

400 or less

130

(5.12)

(15.75)

• CC-Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and GOT

GOT side

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

GOT side

Unit: mm (inch)

5

130

(5.12)

230 or less

(9.06)

40

(1.57)

40

(1.57)

130

(5.12)

230 or less

(9.06)

Unit: mm (inch)

■8.

External I/O device connection

Step 1.

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

Step 2.

Connect the braided shield to the connector with the connector cover.

Step 3.

Twist the power cables.

GOT side

Braided shield

Connector cover

Power cable

External I/O device side

360 or less

(14.17)

40

(1.57)

40

(1.57)

360 or less

(14.17) Unit: mm (inch)

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5 - 15

■9.

Video/RGB connection

(1) Video input cable

Step 1.

Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose outer braided shield for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp.

5.2.6 Grounding a cable

GOT side

Video camera/ vision sensor side

230 or less

(9.06)

40

(1.57)

40

(1.57)

400 or less

(15.75)

Unit: mm (inch)

(2) RGB input cable

Step 1.

Wrap the cable shielding material around the cable, and pull out the braided cables for grounding from the cable shielding material with the length as shown in the figure below.

Step 2.

Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

GT2715

GOT side

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

Vision sensor/ personal computer side

130 or less

(5.12)

GT2712,GT2710,GT2708

GOT side

Cable shielding material

Grounding braided wire

(50 (1.97))

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

40 or

less

(1.57)

110 or less

(4.33) Unit: mm (inch)

Vision sensor/ personal computer side

Cable shielding material

130 or less

(5.12)

40 or less

(1.57)

Grounding braided wire

(50 (1.97))

170 or less

(6.69) Unit: mm (inch)

(3) RGB output cable

Step 1.

Wrap the cable shielding material around the cable, and pull out the braided cables for grounding from the cable shielding material with the length as shown in the figure below.

Step 2.

Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

GOT side

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

External display side

5 - 16

200 or less

(7.87)

Cable shielding material

Grounding braided wire (50 (1.97))

20 or less

(0.79)

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

20 or less

(0.79)

200 or less

(7.87) Unit: mm (inch)

■10.

Non-Mitsubishi PLC, microcomputer, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier,

CNC, MODBUS/RTU, and MODBUS/TCP connections

Create the cables (RS-232 cable, RS-422/485 cable) for connecting the GOT and a controller by yourself.

For how to create a cable, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 compatible for a controller used

Treatment of the RS-232 cable and RS-422/485 cable

When the GOT is connected to a controller, configure the system according to the EMC Directive specifications for the controller.

The following shows the recommended instructions to comply with the EMC Directive.

However, the manufacturer of the equipment must determine the method to comply with the EMC

Directive and conformance to the directive.

(1) RS-422/485 cable

• When connecting each signal wire (except SG and FG wires), twist two signal wires as shown below.

5

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

• Connect two or more SG wires.

(2) RS-232 cable

• Twist each signal wire (except SG and FG wires) with the SG wire.

GOT side

RD

SD

DTR

DSR

SD

RD

DSR

DTR

SG SG

• Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

PLC CPU side

100 or less

(3.94)

100 or less

(3.94)

Unit: mm (inch)

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5 - 17

5.2.6

Grounding a cable

■1.

Grounding method

Ground the cable and ground cable to the control panel where the GOT and the PLC are installed.

Ground the braided shield section of the cable to the control panel with the cable clamp (AD75CK).

Braided shield

Ground the ground cable to the FG terminal at the GOT power supply section when using

GT15-C □ EXSS-1 or GT15-C □ BS.

Cable clamps

For the attachment details of cable clamps, refer to

AD75CK-type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual

<IB-68682>.

GOT FG terminal FG wire Bus connection cable

To ground a bus connection cable, ground the braided cable for grounding to the control panel by tightening a screw.

■2.

Precautions

Do not arrange the cable clamp close to the other cables that are not clamped.

The noise from the control panel may enter the cable clamp and adversely affect the GOT.

5 - 18

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5.3

Low Voltage Directive Requirements

The Low Voltage Directive requires that the equipment operating with power supply ranging from 50 V AC to 1000 V AC or

75 V DC to 1500 V DC has enough safety.

This section explains the precautions for the installation and wiring of the GOT to comply with the Low Voltage Directive.

The data described herein are produced with our best, based on the regulation requirements and standards obtained by

Mitsubishi. However, the data do not guarantee that the equipment produced according to the data comply with the above directive.

The manufacturer of the equipment must determine the method to comply with the Low Voltage Directive and conformance to the directive.

5.3.1

Power supply

The insulation specification of the GOT is designed assuming installation category II.

Make sure to supply power to the GOT in installation category II.

5

Category IV Category III Category II Category I

The installation category indicates the withstand surge voltage generated by lightning strike. Installation category I indicates the lowest withstand level, and installation category IV indicates the highest withstand level.

Installation category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolation transformers from the public power distribution.

5.3.2

Control panel

The GOT is an open type device (designed to be integrated in equipment).

Make sure to install the GOT in a control panel.

■1.

Electric shock protection

To prevent a person who does not have enough knowledge of electric facilities, such as an operator, from electric shock, take the following measures on the control panel.

(1) Locking the control panel

Lock the control panel, and allow only a person who is well educated and has enough knowledge of electric facilities to unlock the control panel.

(2) Automatic power shutdown

Build the structure so that the power supply is shut down when the control panel is opened.

■2.

Dustproof and waterproof features

The control panel also prevents dust and water.

Insufficient dustproof and waterproof protection may lower the insulation withstand voltage, resulting in an insulation breakdown.

Since the insulation of the GOT is designed assuming pollution degree 2, use the GOT in an environment of pollution degree 2 or less.

Pollution degree

1

Description

2

3

4

Environment where the air is dry and nonconductive dust occurs

Environment where normally nonconductive dust occurs

However, temporary conductivity occasionally occurs due to the accumulated dust.

For example, the inside of the control panel in a control room or in the floor at a typical factory

Environment where conductive dust occurs and conductivity may occur due to the accumulated dust

For example, a typical factory floor

Environment where continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow, and others

For example, outdoor

5.3 Low Voltage Directive Requirements

5 - 19

5.3.3

Grounding

The GOT has the following ground terminals.

The ground terminals must be grounded in use.

Ground the GOT to ensure the safety and to comply with the EMC Directive.

Functional grounding : The functional ground terminal improves noise resistance.

5.3.4

External wiring

■1.

External controllers

If an external device connected to the GOT has a hazardous voltage circuit, the interface circuit to the GOT must have a reinforced insulation.

■2.

Reinforced insulation

The reinforced insulation indicates the insulation with the following withstand voltage.

Reinforced insulation withstand voltage (Source: Installation Category II of IEC664)

Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area

150 V AC or less

300 V AC or less

Withstand surge voltage (1.2/50 µs)

2500V

4000V

5 - 20

5.3 Low Voltage Directive Requirements

6. INSTALLATION AND

REMOVAL

6.1

Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

6.2

Panel Cut Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

6.3

Installation Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5

6.4

Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11

6.5

Installing and Removing the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

6.6

Installing and Removing the Extension Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 18

6.7

Installing and Removing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 21

6.8

Installing and Removing the SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 31

6.9

Installing and Removing the USB Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 36

6.10

Installing and Removing the USB cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 37

6

6 - 1

6.1

Installation Precautions

Install the GOT with consideration of the control panel inside dimensions and the installation prohibited area.

Depending on the types of connection cables connected to the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required.

Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius.

6.2

Panel Cut Dimensions

■1.

GT27, GT25

Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

For GT2715-X

C B C

C A C

A

Horizontal

For GT27 (except GT2715-X) and GT25

C

Vertical

B C

Horizontal

6 - 2

6.1 Installation Precautions

Vertical

Model

GT2715

GT2712,GT2512

GT2710,GT2510

GT2708,GT2508

GT2705

A

383.5(15.10)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

302(11.89)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

289(11.38)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

227(8.94)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

153(6.02)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

B

282.5(11.12)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

228(8.98)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

200(7.87)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

176(6.93)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

121(4.76)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

C

10(0.39) or More

■2.

GT23

Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

A

C B C

Unit: mm (inch)

Panel thickness

1.6 (0.06)to 4(0.16)

6

Model

GT2310

GT2308

Horizontal

A

289(11.38)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

227(8.94)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

B

200(7.87)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

176(6.93)

(+2(0.08), 0(0))

Vertical

C

10(0.39) or More

Unit: mm (inch)

Panel thickness

1.6(0.06) to 4(0.16)

6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions

6 - 3

■3.

GT21

Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

C B

A

C

Model

GT2104-R

GT2103-P

Horizontal Vertical

A

118(4.65)

(+1(0.04), 0(0))

105(4.14)

(+1(0.04), 0(0))

B

92(3.63)

(+1(0.04), 0(0))

66(2.60)

(+1(0.04), 0(0))

C

13(0.52) or more

13(0.52) or more

Unit: mm (inch)

Panel thickness

1(0.04) to 4(0.16)

1(0.04) to 4(0.16)

6 - 4

6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions

6.3

Installation Position

To install the GOT, some distance is required between the GOT and the other devices.

■1.

For GT27,GT25

Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required.

Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius.

For the cable pull-out distance from the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following.

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward.

4.1 GT27, GT25

B

6

C D E

A

Horizontal Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm

(0.06 to 0.16inch)

D

E

B A

C

Vertical Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm

(0.06 to 0.16inch)

The following tables list the distance required between the GOT and the other devices.

The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT.

However, always keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 °C or lower.

6.3 Installation Position

6 - 5

A

MELSECNET/H communication

unit(optical) fitted *2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit fitted

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit fitted

B

GOT only

Item

Bus connection unit is fitted

Serial connection unit is fitted

CC-Link communication unit

(GT15-J61BT13) fitted

MELSECNET/H communication unit (coaxial) fitted *1

Video input unit fitted

*1

RGB input unit fitted

*3

Video/RGB input unit fitted

*1*3

RGB output unit fitted

*3

Multimedia unit fitted

*1

Printer unit fitted

External I/O unit fitted

Sound output unit fitted

Unit: mm (inch)

GT27 GT25

GT2715 GT2712 GT2710 GT2708 GT2705 GT2512 GT2510 GT2508

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[29(1.14

) or more]

59(2.33) or more

23(0.91) or more

[29(1.14

) or more]

48(1.89) or more

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[29(1.14

) or more]

23(0.91) or more

[29(1.14

) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

47(1.85) or more

50(1.97) or more

[22(0.87

) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71

)or more]

48(1.89) or more

[38(1.50

) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[45(1.77

) or more]

67(2.64) or more

81(3.19) or more

48(1.89) or more

[38(1.50

) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[45(1.77

) or more]

67(2.64) or more

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

77(3.04) or more

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71

)or more]

48(1.89) or more

[38(1.50

) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[45(1.77

) or more]

67(2.64) or more

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

55(2.17) or more

55(2.17) or more

-

-

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71

)or more]

48(1.89) or more

[38(1.50

) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[45(1.77

) or more]

67(2.64) or more

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

-

-

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71

)or more]

48(1.89) or more

[38(1.50

) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[45(1.77

) or more]

67(2.64) or more

-

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

Horizontal: 78(3.07) or more [18(0.71) or more]

Vertical: 48(1.89) or more [18(0.71) or more]

-

-

-

-

-

6 - 6

6.3 Installation Position

C

D

E

*4

*2

*3

Item

When the SD card is used

When the SD card is not used

*1

*4

GT27 GT25

GT2715 GT2712 GT2710 GT2708 GT2705 GT2512 GT2510 GT2508

50(1.97)or more

[20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

100(3.9

4) or more

50(1.97)or more

[20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

50(1.97) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

Horizontal: 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

Vertical: 80(3.15) or more [20(0.79) or more]

100(3.94) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

This value is for use of the coaxial cable 3C-2V (JIS C 3501).

For specifications of the cable, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual for a controller used.

This value differs depending on the cable used.

This value differs depending on the cable used.

If the bending radius of the cable used is greater than the value specified above, apply the value of the cable used.

When opening or closing the battery cover: 72(2.83) or more

6

6.3 Installation Position

6 - 7

■2.

For GT23

Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required.

Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius.

For the cable pull-out distance from the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following.

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward.

4.2 GT23

B

C D E

A

Horizontal

D

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm(0.06 to 0.16inch)

E

B A

6 - 8

C

A

B

C

D

E *1

Item

When the SD card is used

When the SD card is not used

Vertical Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm(0.06 to 0.16inch)

Unit: mm (inch)

GT2310

Horizontal: 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

Vertical: 80(3.15) or more [20(0.79) or more]

GT2308

48(1.89) or more

[18(0.71) or more]

Horizontal: 78(3.07) or more [18(0.71) or more]

Vertical: 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

Horizontal: 50(1.97) or more

Vertical: 80(3.15) or more [50(1.97) or more]

Horizontal: 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

Vertical: 80(3.15) or more [20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

100(3.94) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

*1 When opening or closing the battery cover: 72(2.83) or more

6.3 Installation Position

■3.

GT21

Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required.

Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius.

For the cable pull-out distance from the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following.

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the power supply terminal, which is located on the GOT rear face, is at the lower side.

4.3 GT21

Horizontal

B

C D E

6

A

Panel thickness: 1 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16 inch)

Vertical

C

E

A B

D

Panel thickness: 1 mm to 4 mm (0.04 to 0.16 inch)

6.3 Installation Position

6 - 9

The following table lists the distance required between the GOT and the other devices.

The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT.

Unit: mm (inch)

A

B

Item

GT21

GT2104-R, GT2103-P

50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

C

When the SD card is used

When the SD card is not used

50 (1.97) or more

50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

D

E

*1

50 (1.97) or more

80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

*1 When an RS-232 cable or personal computer connection cable is connected to the rear face of GT2104-RTBD, GT2103-PMBDS, or GT2103-PMBDS2, a distance of 80 mm (3.15 inches) or more is required.

When a user-created RS-232 cable is connected to the connector terminal block at the rear face of GT2104-RTBD, a distance of

20 mm (0.79 inch) or more is required.

6 - 10

6.3 Installation Position

6.4

Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

Install the GOT with its display section positioned as shown below.

Using the GOT with the installation angle other than the following accelerates the deterioration of the GOT.

■1.

GT27, GT25

When a multimedia unit (GT27-MMR-Z), MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13), or

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) is mounted, the operating ambient temperature must be 5°C lower than the maximum temperature described in Section 3.1 General Specifications.

(1) Installing the GOT horizontally

When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 ° to 105 °, the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 °C.

When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 ° to 105 °, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 °C.

GOT

60°

105°

Display section

Control panel or others

(2) Installing the GOT vertically

When the GOT is installed a 90° angle, , the control panel inside temperature must be within 55°C.

When the GOT is installed at any angle other than 90°, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40°C.

Display section

Control panel or others

GOT

90°

6

6.4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

6 - 11

■2.

GT23

Regardless of the installation orientation, install the GT23 so that the following conditions are satisfied.

When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 ° to 105 °, the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 °C.

When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 ° to 105 °, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 °C.

GOT

60°

105°

Display section

Control panel or others

■3.

GT21

(1) Installing the GOT horizontally

When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 ° to 105 °, the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 °C.

When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 ° to 105 °, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 °C.

GOT

60°

105°

Display section

Control panel or others

(2) Installing the GOT vertically

When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 ° to 105 °, the control panel inside temperature must be within 50 °C.

When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 ° to 105 °, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 °C.

Display section

Control panel or others

GOT

60°

105°

6 - 12

6.4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

6.5

Installing and Removing the GOT

The following shows the procedure for installing and removing the GOT.

6.5.1

Installing the GOT

■1.

GT27, GT25, GT23

Install the GOT in the following procedure.

For the panel cut dimensions for the GOT, refer to the following.

6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions

The following shows an installation example for the horizontal direction.

For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward.

4. PART NAMES AND SETTINGS

Step 1.

Insert the GOT rear face into the panel opening.

GOT

6

Panel opening

Step 2.

While positioning a fitting on the mounting hole of the GOT, tighten a screw within the specified torque range

(0.36 N·m to 0.48 N·m).

Tightening the screw with a torque exceeding the specified torque range may deform the GOT front panel, causing the protective sheet to become crinkled.

For GT2715-X (8 fittings)

6.5 Installing and Removing the GOT

6 - 13

For GT27 except GT2715-X ,  GT25 ,  and GT23 (4 fittings)

■2.

GT21

Install the GOT in the following procedure.

For the panel cut dimensions for the GOT, refer to the following.

6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions

The following shows an installation example for the horizontal direction.

For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the power supply terminal, which is located on the GOT rear face, is at the lower side.

4.3 GT21

Cautions for an installation panel

Use a panel that has no warpage, damage, and unevenness on its surface. Failure to do so may not result in waterproof effect.

Determine the panel thickness considering the panel strength.

(For example, even though the panel has thickness within the range, the strength may be insufficient depending on the material and size. Insufficient panel strength may result in warpage depending on the installation position of the GOT and other devices.)

Step 1.

Install a packing to the packing installation groove on the GOT rear face.

Packing

Enlarge

Packing

Packing installation groove

6 - 14

6.5 Installing and Removing the GOT

Step 2.

Insert the GOT rear face into the panel opening. (The following shows an example of the horizontal installation.)

Panel opening

Step 3.

Insert the hook of an installation fitting (supplied) into the mounting hole of the GOT.

Slide the installation fitting toward the GOT rear face.

Then, viewing from the GOT rear face, slide the fitting to the left to fix, and tighten a screw within the specified torque range (0.20 N•m to 0.25 N•m).

Fix the GOT using 4 fittings at the top and the bottom of the GOT.

Installation fitting

Mounting screw 2)

3)

1)

6

Cautions for the GOT installation

Tighten mounting screws within the specified torque range.

Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop.

In addition, waterproof effect or oilproof effect may not be obtained.

Tightening the screw in the specified torque range or more may damage the GOT or distort the panel, causing wrinkles on the surface of the display section. The wrinkles may lower visibility and lead to an incorrect input to the touch panel.

Waterproof effect or oilproof effect may not be obtained because of distortion of the GOT or panel.

Step 4.

The GOT in the factory shipment state has a protective film on the display section.

After installing the GOT, remove the film.

6.5 Installing and Removing the GOT

6 - 15

6.5.2

Removing the GOT

■1.

GT27, GT25, GT23

Step 1.

Remove the screws from the GOT.

Remove the fittings from the GOT.

For GT2715-X (8 fittings)

For GT27 except GT2715-X ,  GT25 ,  and GT23 (4 fittings)

Step 2.

Remove the GOT from the panel opening.

GOT

Panel opening

6 - 16

6.5 Installing and Removing the GOT

■2.

GT21

Step 1.

Remove the mounting screws of the installation fitting on the GOT in the following order 1) to 3).

Remove the installation fitting on the GOT.

Installation fitting

Mounting screw 2)

1)

3)

Step 2.

Remove the GOT from the panel opening.

6

Installation hole

6.5 Installing and Removing the GOT

6 - 17

6.6

Installing and Removing the Extension Unit

For installing and removing a single extension unit, refer to the user's manual included in each extension unit.

Installing the extension interface relay board

Installing any of the following communication units to the GOT does not require the extension interface relay board to be installed.

• Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2)

• MELSECNET/H communication unit

• CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

• CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

• CC-Link communication unit

For installing/removing a wireless LAN communication unit to/from GT27 or GT25, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series Wireless LAN Communication Unit User's Manual

For installing/removing an SD card to/from GT21, refer to the following.

➠ GT21-03SDCD General Description

The procedure of installing and removing the multiple extension units is as follows.

6.6.1

Installing multiple extension units

This section explains the procedure for mounting an extension unit on an already mounted extension unit.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

Remove the connector cover and the stickers from the mounted extension unit.

Connector cover

Sticker

Step 3.

Mount an extension unit on the mounted extension unit.

6 - 18

6.6 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit

Step 4.

Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.36 N·m to 0.48 N·m).

Step 5.

To mount another extension unit, repeat Step 2 to Step 3.

When you do not mount another extension unit, cover the screws with the accessory stickers to avoid static electricity.

Keep the connector cover and the stickers attached.

6

Accessory sticker

Connector cover

Sticker

(1) Mounting position of the communication unit that occupies two extension interfaces

The following lists the communication units that occupy two extension interfaces. These units must be mounted to the GOT directly.

These communication unit cannot be mounted on other communication units.

When a video/RGB unit or a multimedia unit is mounted to the GOT, mount a communication unit on the video/RGB unit or the multimedia unit.

• Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUS2L, and GT15-

75ABUS2L only)

• MELSECNET/H communication unit

• CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

• CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

• CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)

(2) Mounting GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, and GT15-75ABUS2L

These units cannot be mounted on a video/RGB unit or a multimedia unit.

When connecting these units by the bus connection, use GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-

ABUS, or GT15-ABUS2.

6.6 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit

6 - 19

6.6.2

Removing the extension unit

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

Remove the accessory stickers from the mounted extension unit.

Step 3.

Loosen the screws of the unit.

Step 4.

Remove the extension unit.

Step 5.

Install the connector covers and stickers of the extension interface.

Connector cover

Sticker

6 - 20

6.6 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit

6.7

Installing and Removing the Battery

Install a battery to the GOT before the first startup.

The following shows the procedure for installing and removing a battery.(Described with the GOT rear face facing up.)

(1) Battery

• GT27,GT25:

GT27 and GT25 come with a battery in the battery holder. Before using GT27 and GT25, connect the battery connector to the GOT connector.

• GT23 :

Batteries for GT23 (GT11-50BAT) are sold separately. Purchase a battery before using

GT23, mount it to the GOT, and connect the GOT connector to battery connector.

• GT2104-R :

GT2104-R come with a battery in the battery holder.

• GT2103-P :

Installing a battery is not required for GT2103-P. (GT2103-P holds the data by the built-in flash ROM.)

(2) battery replacement time

• GT27, GT25, GT23 :

To replace the battery, leave the GOT on for more than 10 minutes before replacing the battery.Replace the battery within 5 minutes.

• GT2104-R :

Replace the battery within 30 seconds.

6.7.1

Installing the battery

The battery installation procedure differs depending on the GOT models.

■ 1. Installing the battery to GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512 or GT2510

■ 2. Installing the battery to GT2708, GT2705, or GT2508

■ 3. Installing the battery to GT2310 or GT2308

■ 4. Installing the battery to GT2104-R

■1.

Installing the battery to GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512 or GT2510

The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2712 as an example.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

Install the battery to the GOT rear face.

Open the battery cover as shown below.

Battery cover

6

Step 3.

To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector.

6.7.2 Removing the battery

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

6 - 21

Step 4.

The GOT-side connector depends on whether the GOT has a battery extension cable.

• Without a battery extension cable

Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

• With a battery extension cable

Insert the battery connector to the battery extension cable connector of the GOT.

Battery cover Battery extension cable Battery cover

Black cable

Red cable

Black cable

Red cable

Black cable

Red cable

Battery Connector

Without a battery extension cable

Battery Connector

With a battery extension cable

The GT27 models with the following hardware versions have no battery extension cable.

• GT2715: Version G or later (manufactured in September 2014)

• GT2712: Version M or later (manufactured in September 2014)

• GT2710: Version Nor later (manufactured in September 2014)

The GT25 models have no battery extension cable regardless of the hardware version.

For how to check the hardware version, refer to the following.

11.2 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

Step 5.

After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the battery cover until it clicks.

Battery Battery cover

Connector

Step 6.

Turn on the GOT.

Step 7.

Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility.

For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

6 - 22

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

■2.

Installing the battery to GT2708, GT2705, or GT2508

The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2708 as an example.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

Install the battery inside the SD card cover on the side of the GOT.

Open the SD card cover as shown in the following figure.

SD card cover

Step 3.

To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector.

6.7.2 Removing the battery

Step 4.

Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

Connector SD card cover

Battery

Black cable

Red cable

Step 5.

After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the SD card cover until it clicks.

Battery SD card cover

6

Connector

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

6 - 23

Step 6.

Turn on the GOT.

Step 7.

Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility.

For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

■3.

Installing the battery to GT2310 or GT2308

The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2310 as an example.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

Install the battery to the GOT rear face.

Open the battery cover as shown below.

Battery cover

Step 3.

To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector.

6.7.2 Removing the battery

Step 4.

Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

Battery Battery cover

Red cable

Black cable

Connector

6 - 24

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

Step 5.

After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the battery cover until it clicks.

Battery Battery cover

Connector

Step 6.

Turn on the GOT.

Step 7.

Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility.

For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

■4.

Installing the battery to GT2104-R

The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2104-R as an example.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

Open the battery cover as shown below.

Battery cover

GT2104-R

Step 3.

To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector.

6.7.2 Removing the battery

6

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

6 - 25

Step 4.

Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

Connector

GT2104-R

Connector

GT2104-P

Step 5.

After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the battery cover until it clicks.

Battery cover

Battery cover

Battery

Battery

GT2104-R GT2104-P

Step 6.

Turn on the GOT.

Step 7.

Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility.

For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

6 - 26

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

6.7.2

Removing the battery

The battery removal procedure differs depending on the GOT models.

■ 1. Removing the battery from GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512 or GT2510

■ 2. Removing the battery from GT2708, GT2705, or GT2508

■ 3. Removing the battery from GT2310 or GT2308

■ 4. Removing the battery from GT2104-R

■1.

Removing the battery from GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512 or GT2510

The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2712 as an example.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

The battery is stored in the GOT rear face.

Open the battery cover as shown below.

Battery Battery cover

Connector

6

Step 3.

After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the connector.

The GOT-side connector depends on whether the GOT has a battery extension cable.

• Without a battery extension cable

Unplug the battery connector from the GOT connector.

• With a battery extension cable

Unplug the battery connector from the battery extension cable connector of the GOT.

Battery cover Battery extension cable Battery cover

Black cable

Red cable

Black cable

Red cable

Black cable

Red cable

Battery Connector

Without a battery extension cable

Battery Connector

With a battery extension cable

The GT27 models with the following hardware versions have no battery extension cable.

• GT2715: Version G or later (manufactured in September 2014)

• GT2712: Version M or later (manufactured in September 2014)

• GT2710: Version Nor later (manufactured in September 2014)

The GT25 models have no battery extension cable regardless of the hardware version.

For how to check the hardware version, refer to the following.

11.2 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

6 - 27

Step 4.

Push and close the battery cover until it clicks.

Battery cover

■2.

Removing the battery from GT2708, GT2705, or GT2508

The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2708 as an example.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

The battery is stored inside the SD card cover on the side of the GOT.

Open the SD card cover as shown in the following figure.

Battery SD card cover

Connector

Step 3.

After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the battery connector from the GOT connector.

Connector SD card cover

Battery

6 - 28

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

Black cable

Red cable

Step 4.

Close the SD card cover until it clicks.

SD card cover

■3.

Removing the battery from GT2310 or GT2308

The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2310 as an example.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

The battery is stored in the GOT rear face.

Open the battery cover as shown below.

Battery Battery cover

6

Connector

Step 3.

After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the battery connector from the GOT connector.

Battery Battery cover

Red cable

Black cable

Connector

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

6 - 29

Step 4.

Push and close the battery cover until it clicks.

Battery cover

■4.

Removing the battery from GT2104-R

The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2104-R as an example.

Step 1.

Make sure that the GOT power is off.

Step 2.

Open the battery cover as shown below.

Battery cover

GT2104-R

Step 3.

After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the connector.

Connector

Battery

GT2104-R

Step 4.

Push and close the battery cover until it clicks.

Battery cover

GT2104-R

6 - 30

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

6.8

Installing and Removing the SD Card

WARNING

If the SD card mounted on drive A of the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed, processing for the GOT might be interrupted about for 20 seconds.

The GOT cannot be operated during this period.

The functions that run in the background including a screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and others are also interrupted.

This stop affects the system operation, causing an accident.

Remove the SD card after checking the following items.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

Check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

• GT21

Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

CAUTION

If the data storage mounted on the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed, the data storage and files are damaged.

To remove the data storage from the GOT, check that the access to the data storage in SD card access LED, the system signal, and others is not performed.

Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files.

When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

• GT27,GT25,GT23

When inserting a SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover.

Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written.

• GT21

When inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the

GOT utility in advance.

When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out.

Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

Before removing the USB device from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT.

After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the USB device by hand carefully.

Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

The following shows the procedure for installing and removing an SD card.(Described with the GOT rear face facing up.)

6

6.8 Installing and Removing the SD Card

6 - 31

6.8.1

Installing the SD card

■1.

GT27, GT25, GT23

Step 1.

Open the SD card cover as shown below.

Step 2.

After making sure that SD card access LED is off with SD card cover 90 degrees or more open, insert an SD card with its front side facing up.

SD card access LED

Open the cover of the SD card interface 90 degrees or more.

Step 3.

Push and close the SD card cover until it clicks.

6 - 32

Step 4.

When the SD card cover is closed, the access to the SD card is allowed.

6.8 Installing and Removing the SD Card

■2.

GT21

Before inserting or removing an SD card, turn off the GOT or select [Access inhibit] in the SD card access setting of the

GOT.

Step 1.

Touch [Utility main menu] → [Data control] → [SD card access] → [Permissions], and select [Access inhibit].

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Check that the SD card access LED turns off.

When the LED is off, the SD card can be inserted or removed at the GOT power-on.

Step 2.

Open the SD card cover, and insert the SD card with its front side (name plate side) facing outward. Close the SD card cover.

6

Front side of the

Step 3.

Touch [SD card access] → [Access inhibit], and select [Permissions].

Check that the SD card access LED turns on.

6.8 Installing and Removing the SD Card

6 - 33

6.8.2

Removing the SD card

■1.

GT27, GT25, GT23

Step 1.

Open the SD card cover as shown below.

Step 2.

After making sure that SD card access LED is off with SD card cover 90 degrees or more open, push in the

SD card to remove it

SD card access LED

Open the cover of the SD card interface 90 degrees or more.

Step 3.

Close the cover of the SD card interface.

6 - 34

6.8 Installing and Removing the SD Card

■2.

GT21

Step 1.

Touch [[Utility main menu] → [Data control] → [SD card access] → [Permissions], and select [Access inhibit].

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Check that the SD card access LED turns off.

When the LED is off, the SD card can be inserted or removed at the GOT power-on.

Step 2.

Open the SD card cover, and remove the SD card.

6

(1) Cautions for removing the SD card

While the SD card access LED is on, do not remove the SD card or power off the GOT. Doing so results in damage to the SD card and files.

When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to hold the SD card as it may pop out.

(2) Enabling or disabling the SD card access when the SD card cover is removed (GT27 and GT25 only)

The SD card access is enabled or disabled by closing or opening the SD card cover. If the

SD card cover is faulty and remains opened, the SD Card Access Switch Status Control

(GS1820.b0) turns on.

To enable or disable the SD card access, turn on or off GS1820.b1.

6.8 Installing and Removing the SD Card

6 - 35

6.9

Installing and Removing the USB Devices

The following shows the procedure for installing and removing a USB device.

The following shows the procedure for installing and removing a USB device

When connecting the devices to the USB interface (Host) using USB hub with the GOT power on, drive assignment of connected USB devices may be changed.To use the USB hub devices, turn on the GOT with the devices connected.

6.9.1

Installing the USB devices

Step 1.

Push the [PUSH] mark on the USB environmental protection cover to open the cover.

Step 2.

Insert the USB interface to the USB interface (Host) as shown below.

Make sure to insert the USB interface connector in the correct direction.

6.9.2

Removing the USB devices

Step 1.

Place the USB device in removable mode.For the setting method, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Step 2.

Remove the USB interface from the USB interface (Host) as shown below.

6 - 36

Step 3.

Push the [PUSH] mark on the USB environmental protection cover to close the cover.

6.9 Installing and Removing the USB Devices

6.10 Installing and Removing the USB cable

The following shows the procedure for installing and removing a USB cable to the USB interface on the GOT rear face.

6.10.1

Installing the USB cable

Install the USB cable to the GOT in the following procedure.

Attach a cable clamp depending on the usage environment, such as when fixing a cable is difficult.

Step 1.

Install the USB cable to a USB interface (Host/device) on the GOT rear face.

Step 2.

Insert a cable clamp to the mounting hole for a cable clamp shown in the following figure and push it until you hear a clicking sound. For the direction that the band goes through, refer to the arrow in the figure.

(Cable clamp used in this example: RSG-130-V0, KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD.)

6

Step 3.

Pass the USB cable through a hole of the cable clamp and pull the band to fix the cable.

6.10 Installing and Removing the USB cable

6 - 37

6.10.2

Removing the USB cable

When removing the mounted cable clamp and USB cable, refer to the following procedure.

(Cable clamp used in this example: RSG-130-V0, KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD.)

Step 1.

Remove the cable clamp band

Draw out the band while pushing up the tab of the cable clamp with a screwdriver or other tools.

Band Tab Driver

Step 2.

Remove the cable clamp while holding its both sides (Arrow A in the figure). Removing the USB cable

A

A

The USB cable can be removed from the unit with the cable clamp. Remove the cable with holding both sides of the cable clamp (Arrow A in the figure).

A

A

6 - 38

6.10 Installing and Removing the USB cable

7. WIRNG OF POWER SUPPLY

SECTION

7.1

Wiring of External Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3

7.2

Power Supply Wiring to th GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4

7.3

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6

7.4

Wiring Inside and Outside the Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10

7.5

Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment . . . . . . 7 - 11

7.6

Grounding the Extension Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12

7

7 - 1

WARNING

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.

Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.

Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100 Ω or less which is used exclusively for the GOT.

Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. (GT21 does not have the LG terminal.)

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product.

Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range.

Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.

Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

CAUTION

Plug the communication cable into the connector to be connected, and tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range.

Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

This section describes wiring to the GOT power supply section.

For the connection to a controller, refer to the following manual.

➠ GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 compatible for a controller used

For external dimensions of connection cable, refer to the following.

11. APPENDICES

General preventive measures against noise

There are two kinds of noises: Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines. Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points.

(1) Protecting against noise

(a) Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high-power drive circuit.

(b) Shield the signal lines.

(2) Reducing generated noise

(a) Use a noise filter, etc. to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high-power motor drive circuit.

(b) Attach a surge suppressor on the terminal of the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor to supress the noise.

(3) Releasing noise to the ground

(a) Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground.

(b) Use a short and thick cable to lower its ground resistance.

(c) Ground the power system and the control system separately.

7 - 2

7.1

Wiring of External Power Supply

■1.

Separating the power supply system

Carry out wiring so that the power supply system is separated into the GOT, I/O equipment, and power equipment as shown below.

When frequent noise is identified, connect an isolation transformer.

Main power

GOT power

Isolation transformer

GOT

T1

I/O power

I/O equipment

Main circuit power

Main circuit equipment

■2.

Separating the power cables from the main circuit line and the I/O signal line

Separate the 100 V AC, 200 V AC, and 24 V DC cables from the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) and I/O signal lines.

Separate them with a distance of 100 mm or more as a guide.

■3.

Treatment on power cables

Twist 100 V AC, 200 V AC, and 24 V DC cables as closely as possible, and connect the cables with the minimum length between the power supply and each device.

To minimize the voltage drop, use thick wires as much as possible (Cable cross section: 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2).

Use M3 solderless terminals, and securely tighten them with a tightening torque of 0.5 N·m to 0.8 N·m to prevent any problems.

■4.

Connecting the lightning surge absorber

As measures against surge due to lightning, connect a lightning surge absorber as shown below.

7

AC GOT

E2

E1

← Lightening surge absorber

Separate the grounding of the lightning surge absorber (E1) from the grounding of the GOT (E2).

Select an appropriate lightning surge absorber that has the maximum allowable circuit voltage withstanding the maximum power supply voltage.

7.1 Wiring of External Power Supply

7 - 3

7.2

Power Supply Wiring to th GOT

The following shows the examples of wiring the power cable, ground cable and other cables to the GOT power supply terminal.

GT27, GT25, GT23

Fuse

GOT

INPUT

100-240VAC

For 100 V AC

INPUT

24VDC

+

GOT

For 24 V DC

Ground cable

Grounding

GT21

24 V DC +10%

-15%

GOT power supply terminal

Ground cable

Grounding

■1.

Precautions

(1) Treatment on power cables

For 100 V AC, 200 V AC, and 24 V DC cables, use thick wires as much as possible (Cable cross section: 0.75 mm

2 to 2 mm

2

), and make sure to twist them to the terminals.

To prevent a short circuit due to loose screws, use a solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve.

(2) Grounding

After connecting the LG terminal and the FG terminal, make sure to connect them to the ground.

Otherwise, the system is susceptible to noise.

The LG terminal has a potential equal to a half of the input voltage.

Therefore, touching the terminal may lead to an electric shock.

For GT2705-V, connect only the FG terminal because the model does not have the LG terminal.

7 - 4

7.2 Power Supply Wiring to th GOT

■2.

Precautions (GT21)

(1) Terminal processing of power cables

Connect a stranded wire or a single wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.

Do not tighten the terminal screws in the specified torque range or more. Doing so can cause a failure or malfunction.

(a) When connecting a stranded wire or a single wire directly

Twist the end of the stranded wire to prevent the elemental wires from protruding.

Do not apply solder plating on the wire terminal.

Approx.

5 mm

(0.20inch)

(b) When using a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve

A wire with a thick sheath cannot enter the insulation sleeve smoothly. Select a wire referring to the figure of external dimensions below.

Insulation sleeve

Contact part

2mm to 2.5 mm

(0.08inch) to (0.10inch)

6mm

(0.24inch)

10.5mm to 12 mm

(0.42inch to 0.48inch)

Manufacturer

PHOENIX CONTACT

Swage

CRIMPFOX UD6

(2) Tool

Tighten the power supply terminal using a commercially-available small screwdriver. The tip of the screwdriver must be straight and as wide as the shaft, as shown in the figure below.

7

Manufacturer

PHOENIX CONTACT

0.4mm

(0.02inch)

Straight tip

2.5mm

(0.10inch)

Model

SZS 0.4 × 2.5

7.2 Power Supply Wiring to th GOT

7 - 5

7.3

Grounding

Each GOT has the following ground terminals.

• GT27 (except GT2705-V), GT25, GT23: FG terminal and LG terminal

• GT2705-V, GT21 : FG terminal

7.3.1

Grounding the GOT

■1.

Grounding method

Ground the GOT as shown below.

• Use independent grounding as much as possible for the GOT.

Ground the GOT with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less.

• When independent grounding cannot be applied for the GOT, use shared grounding as shown in (2) below.

GOT Other device

Grounding

(ground resistance: 100

Ω or less)

GOT Other device

Grounding

(ground resistance:

100 Ω or less)

GOT Other device

…… ……

• For the grounding methods of (1) and (2) above, use a cable with 2 mm

2

or more cross section.

Make a ground point near the GOT as much as possible to shorten the ground cable.

■2.

Grounding examples

(1) Independent grounding (Best)

For grounding for control system, ground the system at one end.

Especially for the control devices communicating each other, ground the system at one end.

Power equipment

(such as servo)

CN1A CN1B

FG

LG

CN2 CN3

Connection cable

FG

FG

LG

GOT

Ground terminal block

Panel grounding

Ground terminal block

Grounding for control system

Grounding for power system

7 - 6

7.3 Grounding

(2) Shared grounding (Good)

Ground the system at one end.

To prevent noise from entering the GOT, use a short and thick wire for grounding between the ground and the control panel to lower ground resistance.

Power equipment

(such as servo)

CN1A CN1B

FG

LG

CN2 CN3

Connection cable

FG

FG

LG

GOT

Panel grounding

Panel grounding

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

(3) Common grounding (Not allowed)

Do not connect the ground cables of the power equipment and control equipment with a wire.

When the cables are connected, noise from the power equipment may affect the control equipment, causing a malfunction.

Power equipment

(such as servo)

Connection cable

CN1A CN1B

CN2 CN3

FG

LG

FG The power equipment and the control equipment are connected with a wire.

Panel grounding

FG

LG

GOT

Panel grounding

7

■3.

Recommended terminal shape

φ 3.2

6.2 mm or less

φ 3.2

6.2 mm or less

Terminal screw

Solderless terminal

When wiring one cable to one terminal

Applicable solderless terminal

RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Terminal screw

Solderless terminal

When wiring two cables to one terminal

7.3 Grounding

7 - 7

7.3.2

Causes of wiring-related malfunction and countermeasure examples

Causes of a malfunction due to grounding of the GOT include potential difference caused by grounding and noise.

The following measures may reduce potential difference and noise.

■1.

Wiring of the ground cable and power line of the GOT

When the ground cable and power line of the GOT are installed together, the GOT may malfunction due to noise.

Separating the ground cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise.

GOT

LG FG

GOT

LG FG

Power for the power equipment

Good example: The ground and power cables

are separated in wiring.

Power for the power equipment

Bad example: The ground and power cables

are installed together.

■2.

When leading the ground cable from the control panel having control equipment into the control panel having the GOT

When a single ground cable is led from the control panel having control equipment, including a PLC, into the control panel having the GOT, the cable may be directly connected to the power terminal of the GOT.

Connection cable

Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment

FG

LG

GOT

The malfunction due to the potential difference caused by the grounding in such a case may be prevented by reducing the voltage as shown in countermeasure example 1 below.

(1) Countermeasure example 1

When any potential difference between the ground cable and the control panel having the GOT affects the GOT, also connect the ground cable to the control panel.

When Countermeasure example 1-1 is difficult to be taken, such as the wiring is impossible, carry out wiring as shown in Countermeasure example 1-2.

Measure example 1-1 Measure example 1-2

Connection cable

Connection cable

GOT GOT

FG

LG Ground wires

FG

LG

Ground wires

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

Grounding to the panel

Grounding to the panel

7 - 8

If noise further affects the GOT by taking Countermeasure example 1, Countermeasure example 2 may reduce the influence of noise.

7.3 Grounding

(2) Countermeasure example 2

If the noise from the control panel having the GOT adversely affects the GOT even after Countermeasure example 1 is taken, attach the ferrite core (KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. RFC-H13 or equivalent).

When attaching a ferrite core, insert the cable through the ferrite core several times (approximately three times).

When Countermeasure example 2-1 is difficult to be taken, such as the wiring is impossible, carry out wiring as shown in Countermeasure example 2-2.

Measure example 2-1 Measure example 2-2

Connection cable

Connection cable

GOT

Ground wires

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

FG

LG

Ferrite core

Grounding to the panel

Ground wires

FG

LG

GOT

Ferrite core

Grounding to the panel

7

7.3 Grounding

7 - 9

7.4

Wiring Inside and Outside the Control Panel

7.4.1

Control panel inside wiring

As shown in the following figure, power lines, including power cables and servo amplifier driving cables, and communication cables, including bus connection cables and network cables, must not be mixed.

Mixing the power lines and communication cables may cause a malfunction due to noise.

When devices that generate surge noise, including a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), electromagnetic contactor (MC), relay (RA), solenoid valve, and induction motor, are used, a surge suppressor is effective.

For the surge suppressor, refer to the following.

➠ 7.5 Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment

Separately wired power lines and communication cables

Power cable

Inside control panel

NFB

GOT connection cable

Mixed power lines and communication cables

Power cable

Inside control panel

NFB

GOT connection cable

PLC I/O wire PLC

I/O wire

MC MC MC RA RA

Driving control line

Terminal block

MC RA RA

Driving control line

Terminal block

7.4.2

Control panel outside wiring

To lead the power line and the communication cable outside the control panel, open cable holes at two separate places to lead the cables separately out.

When the cables are led out through the same cable hole for wiring reasons, the cables are more easily affected by noise.

Wiring the power lines and the communication cables outside the control panel

Power line

Power line

Communication cable

Communication cable

Cable hole

Separate the power line and communication cable each other 100 mm or more in the duct.

When the cables are close each other for wiring reasons, use a separator (made of metal).

Doing so reduces the noise influence.

Wiring of power line and communication cable in the duct

Power line

Wiring duct Separator

100 mm or more

Signal wire Power line Communication cable

7 - 10

7.4 Wiring Inside and Outside the Control Panel

7.5

Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment

When the GOT fails to work properly, for example a communication error occurs, in synchronization with the ON/OFF status of the specific control equipment, including a molded case circuit breaker, electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, and induction motor (hereinafter described as load), the GOT may be affected by surge noise.

In such a case, separate the ground cable and the communication cable from the load.

When the ground cable or communication cable has to be installed close to the load, attaching a surge suppressor is effective.

Attach a surge suppressor closest to the load.

■1.

Measures against AC inductive load

The GOT ground cable and the communication cable must not be installed close to the load.

Output equipment such as PLC's output module

Output

AC

C

R

L a d

L o

The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load.

■2.

Measures against DC inductive load

The GOT ground cable and the communication cable must not be installed close to the load.

Output equipment such as PLC's output module

Output

DC

D

L a d

L o

The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load.

7

7.5 Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment

7 - 11

7.6

Grounding the Extension Unit

7.6.1

Wiring of the FG cable of a bus connection cable

This section explains wiring of FG cables when a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU with bus connection cables.

Cables connected to the PLC CPU

Do not install the connection cable together with or close to the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) or I/O signal lines.

■1.

Connecting the QCPU/motion controller CPU (Q series) and GOT

Grounding of the FG cable for the QCPU and motion controller CPU (Q series) is unnecessary since they have no FG cable.

■2.

Connecting the QnACPU/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) and GOT

Ground a GOT as shown below when GT15-C □ EXSS-1 or GT15-C □ BS is used.

(1) Terminals of the GOT

Layout of terminal blocks of a GOT differs depending on the GOT model.

Check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used and perform wiring.

(2) Ground cables

Up to two ground cables can be connected to each of LG and FG of the GOT.

When three or more ground cables need to be connected, connect the third and later cables to the LG.

(1) For GT15-C □ EXSS-1

Not connected

PLC

GOT

(GT15-C □ BS)

FG

LG

N

L

(GT15-EXCNB)

OUT IN

L N LG FG

2SQ wire FG terminal

28 cm or less

Step 1.

Connect the LG and FG of the GOT power supply at the terminal block and ground them with one cable.

Step 2.

Wire the FG cable of the GT15-C □ BS. The length of the cable must be 28 cm or shorter.

Step 3.

Do not connect the ground cable for FG of the GT15-EXCNB.

Step 4.

Connect the FG cable of the GT15-C □ BS at the GOT side to FG of the power terminal block of the GOT.

Step 5.

Connect the FG cable of the GT15-C □ BS at the PLC side to the FG of the power supply module of the

PLC.

Step 6.

Connect the LG and FG of the PLC at the terminal block and ground them with one cable.

(2) For GT15-C □ BS

Perform the grounding at the GOT side (described in (1)) for both GOTs.

7 - 12

7.6 Grounding the Extension Unit

8. OPERATING THE GOT

8.1

Outline Procedure to Start the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2

8.2

Creating Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5

8

8 - 1

8.1

Outline Procedure to Start the GOT

This section explains the outline procedure to operate the GOT.

Start

Preparing project data

Installing an extension unit and option

Installing the GOT, and power supply wiring

Writing package data

Connecting the GOT and the controller

Starting monitoring

End

■1.

Preparing project data

Step 1.

Install GT Designer3 Version1 on the personal computer.

For how to install GT Designer3 Version1, refer to the following.

➠ GT Works3 Version1 Installation Instructions

Step 2.

Create project data with GT Designer3 Version1.

For how to use GT Designer3 Version1 and create project data, refer to the following.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

■2.

Installing an extension unit and option

Step 1.

Install options other than the SD card and USB memory to the GOT.

For how to install options, refer to the following.

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

➠ User's Manual of each option

Step 2.

Install an extension unit to the GOT.

For how to install extension units, refer to the following.

6.6 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit

■3.

Installing the GOT, and power supply wiring

Step 1.

Install the GOT to the control panel.

For how to install the GOT, refer to the following.

6.5 Installing and Removing the GOT

Step 2.

Carry out wiring of power cables for the GOT.

For the wiring of power cables, refer to the following.

7. WIRNG OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION

8 - 2

8.1 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT

■4.

Writing package data

Write package data with GT Designer3 Version1.

The writing procedure differs depending on the data writing method.

Terms

(1) Basic software

The basic software is equivalent to an operating system of the GOT.

A GOT in which no basic software is written cannot be started.

(2) Package data

The package data contains project data and applications necessary to execute the project data.

Writing the package data into the GOT enables you to use the user-created project data on the GOT.

(1) Writing package data directly from a personal computer to the GOT

Connect the GOT and a personal computer, and write the package data to the GOT.

Step 1.

Connect the personal computer and GOT.

• USB:

Connect the USB interface (Device) and the USB port of the personal computer with a USB cable.

• Ethernet:

Connect the Ethernet interface and the Ethernet port of the personal computer with an Ethernet cable.

To write the package data to the GOT by Ethernet, install the basic software to the GOT and configure the communication settings to enable the communication between the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet in advance.

• Via PLC:

Connect the GOT and the personal computer via the PLC connected to the GOT.

For each connection setting, refer to the following.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

Step 2.

Turn on the GOT.

Step 3.

Write the package data with GT Designer3 Version1.

For how to write the package data, refer to the following.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

(2) Writing package data from the data storage to the GOT

Write the package data to the GOT using the data storage such as an SD card.

Step 1.

Install a data storage such as an SD card to the personal computer.

Step 2.

Write the package data to the data storage with GT Designer3 Version1.

For how to write the package data, refer to the following.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

Step 3.

Install the data storage to the GOT.

• SD card (A drive): Insert the card to the SD card interface.

• USB memory (Drive B): Insert the memory to the USB interface (Host).

• Other data storage (Drive B to drive G): Connect the storage to the USB interface (Host).

8

8.1 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT

8 - 3

Step 4.

Turn on the GOT.

To start the GOT with the built-in flash memory (Drive C), write the package data to the built-in flash memory (Drive C) of the GOT.

For how to write the package data, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

To start the GOT with the data storage (Drive A, B, D to G), writing the package data to the built-in flash memory (Drive C) of the GOT is not required.

■5.

Connecting the GOT and the controller

Step 1.

Check the communication settings in the utility screen of the GOT.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Step 2.

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Step 3.

Connect the GOT and controller with a cable.

➠ GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 compatible for a controller used

■6.

Starting monitoring

Step 1.

Turn on the GOT and the connected system.

Step 2.

The GOT starts monitoring.

Precautions when the startup source of the GOT is any other than the built-in flash memory (Drive C)

(1) GOT startup time

The GOT startup time is longer than the normal startup time.

The GOT startup time differs depending on the data storage type, number of written applications, and package data size.

(2) Handling the SD card during the GOT startup

When the startup source is the SD card (Drive A), do not open the cover of the SD card interface during the GOT startup.

Doing so causes the GOT to fail to start normally.

(3) Corrective actions when the GOT cannot be started

The GOT cannot be started in any of the following conditions.

Take the following corrective actions, and turn on the GOT again.

Condition

The type of the physical GOT differs from the

GOT type of the package data stored in the SD card.

Corrective action

Prepare the SD card that stores the package data containing the GOT type same as the GOT to be used.

The GOT has insufficient memory.

Delete unnecessary data in the memory of the

GOT.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

8 - 4

8.1 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT

8.2

Creating Project Data

Create project data with GT Designer3 Version1.

For how to operate GT Designer3 Version1, refer to the following.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

■1.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Starting GT Designer3 Version1

When starting GT Designer3 Version1, make sure to start the GOT2000 application.

You cannot create the GOT2000 screens with the GOT1000 application.

8

8.2 Creating Project Data

8 - 5

8 - 6

8.2 Creating Project Data

9. MAINTENANCE AND

INSPECTION

9.1

Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3

9.2

Periodic Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4

9.3

Screen Cleaning Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5

9.4

Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement . . . . 9 - 6

9

9 - 1

WARNING

When power is on, do not touch the terminals.

Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.

Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.

Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases.

Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.

Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the unit.

Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.

Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.

Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.

The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion.

Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc.

Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.

(Refer to 9.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement for details of the battery

directive in the EU member states.)

9 - 2

9.1

Daily Inspection

The GOT does not have consumable components that shorten its life.

However, the battery and liquid crystal display have limited life.

The periodical replacement of the battery is recommended.

For replacing the liquid crystal display, consult Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

For the battery and the liquid crystal display, refer to the following.

3.2 Performance Specifications

■1.

Daily inspection items

Item Inspection item Inspection method Criterion

1) Securely tightened

2)

3)

GOT installation status Check for loose screws.

Connection status

Loose terminal screws

Proximity of solderless terminals

Loose contactors

Usage status

Dirt on the protective sheet

Foreign material adherence

Retighten screws with a screwdriver.

Visual check

Visual check

Visual check

Visual check

Not loose

Proper intervals

Not loose

Not outstanding

Corrective action

Retighten screws with the specified torque.

Retighten terminal screws.

Correct intervals.

Retighten contactor fixing screws.

Replace the sheet with a new sheet.

No foreign matter adherence

Remove and clean the foreign material.

For the model of the protective sheet and the replacement procedure, refer to the following.

➠ User's manual of the protective sheet

9

9.1 Daily Inspection

9 - 3

9.2

Periodic Inspection

■1.

Half-yearly or yearly inspection items

Inspect the following items when moving or modifying equipment, or changing wiring.

Item Inspection item Inspection method Criterion

Ambient temperature

Display section

0 °C to 40 °C

1

Surrounding environment

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Measure corrosive gas with a thermometer or hygrometer.

Other sections 0 °C to 55 °C

10 % RH to 90% RH

No corrosive gas

2

GOT with

100 V AC -

240 V AC power

Power supply voltage check

Measure voltage across the

100 V AC terminal to the

240 V AC terminal.

85 V AC to 242 V AC

3

4

GOT with 24

V DC power

Installation status

Connection status

Input polarity of 24 V DC power

Looseness

Foreign material adherence

Loose terminal screws

Proximity of solderless terminals

Loose contactors

Measure voltage across 24

V DC terminals.

Move the unit.

Visual check

Retighten screws with a screwdriver.

Visual check

Visual check

Left: -

Right: +

Mounted firmly

No foreign matter adherence

Not loose

Proper intervals

Not loose

Corrective action

For use in a control panel, the control panel inside temperature is the ambient temperature.

Change the power supply.

Change wiring.

Retighten screws.

Remove and clean the foreign material.

Retighten terminal screws.

Correct intervals.

5 Battery

Check the voltage status of the GOT built-in battery in

[Time] of the utility.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's

Manual (Utility)

No alarm

Retighten contactor fixing screws.

Replace the battery with a new battery when the current battery has reached the specified life span, even if the low voltage is not indicated.

9 - 4

9.2 Periodic Inspection

9.3

Screen Cleaning Method

Use the GOT always in a clean condition.

To clean the GOT, wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent or ethanol.

Clean

Precautions for screen cleaning

Do not use solvents such as acetone, benzene, toluene, and alcohol.

Solvents may deform the protective sheet or peel the dissolvable paint on the surface.

In addition, do not use spray solvents.

Doing so may cause an electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices.

9

9.3 Screen Cleaning Method

9 - 5

9.4

Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement

■1.

Low-voltage battery detection and battery replacement

The battery is used to hold the SRAM data, clock data, and backup data of the system status log data.

The periodical replacement of the battery is recommended.

For the battery replacement procedure, refer to the following.

6.7 Installing and Removing the Battery

You can check if the battery has a low voltage by using the utility and the system alarm.

For details of the battery status display by using the utility, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

The system alarm enables the GOT to display the message notifying the low-voltage battery when the battery voltage is low.

To display the message by the system alarm, set [Battery alarm display] to ON.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

System alarm

500 Warning! Built-in battery voltage is low.

For the details of the system alarm, refer to the following.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

Battery replacement timing

When a low-voltage battery is detected, replace the battery immediately.

The GOT retains the data for 14 days after the low-voltage battery detection. However, after the period, the GOT cannot retain the data.

9 - 6

9.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement

■2.

Handling of batteries and devices with built-in batteries in EU member states

This section explains the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and for exporting batteries and devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.

(1) Precautions for disposal

EU member states have a separate collection system for waste batteries.

Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection/recycling center.

The following symbol is printed on batteries and packaging of devices with built-in batteries used for Mitsubishi

Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT).

This symbol is valid in the EU member states only.

The symbol is specified in Article 20 "Information for end-users" and ANNEX II of the new EU

Battery Directive (2006/66/EC).

The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes.

(2) Precautions for export

The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the following when batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries are sold and exported to EU member states.

• To print the symbol on batteries, devices, or their packaging

• To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products

The batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries manufactured before the EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) took effect are also subject to the directive.

(a) Labelling the symbol

To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no symbol, to EU member states, print the symbol as shown in (1) above on the GOT or its packaging.

(b) Attaching the manual

To export devices incorporating the GOT to EU member states, attach this manual.

If no GOT manual is included with the equipment, separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to the manuals of each device.

9

9.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement

9 - 7

9 - 8

9.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

10.1

GOT Restoration Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2

10.2

Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14

10.3

Error Messages and System Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17

10

10 - 1

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

This section provides check sheets for restoration in cases where the GOT does not operate normally.

The following explains how to use each sheet.

■1.

When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions (GOT status check sheet)

When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions, identify the cause of the malfunction using ■ the GOT status check sheet, and take a corrective action.

When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.

■2.

When the wiring needs to be improved (GOT installation status check sheet)

As a result of the above check (1), the cause of the malfunction or others is thought to be due to the noise generated by the GOT wiring status, take a corrective action for wiring by using the GOT installation status check sheet.

When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.

■3.

When a corrective action other than the above is required (System configuration check sheet)

If a malfunction or others still occurs even after the above checks, fill out the system configuration check sheet with details about your system, and consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

When sending a faulty product, attach the GOT restoration sheets (GOT status check sheet, GOT installation status check sheet, and the system configuration check sheet) checked in this section.

Keep copies of the restoration sheets.

10 - 2

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

10.1.1

GOT status check sheet

Check the GOT starting from ■1. GOT status.

Mark checkboxes that apply.to the symptom of your GOT.

Proceed according to the corrective actions.

■1.

GOT status

(1) Check of failure frequency, such as the GOT does not operate and an error occurs on the screen

Check

Symptom

Always occurs.

• Frequency:

Cause Corrective action

Proceed to (2).

□ Occurs sometimes.

Example: Once a month

(2) Check of the displayed error code (system alarm)

Check Symptom Cause

• Error code (system alarm):

□ Can be checked.

□ Cannot be checked.

Example: 460 Communication unit error

Corrective action

Take the corrective action for the error code (system alarm) or error message.

If the status does not change with the corrective action, proceed to (3).

Proceed to (3).

(3) Check of the POWER LED

Check

Symptom

Lit in blue.

(GT27, GT25, GT23 only)

Cause/status

The power is supplied normally.

Lit in orange

(GT27, GT25, GT23 only)

Screen saving is being performed.

When the read device of the system information was set, the device was turned on and the screen was switched to the forced screen saving status.

Blinks in orange/blue.

(GT27, GT25, GT23 only)

A backlight failure has occurred.

Not lit

The power is not supplied.

If the power is supplied, the GOT hardware may be faulty.

Corrective action

Proceed to (4).

Check the setting of the read device.

If no problem is found in the setting, proceed to (4).

Proceed to ■ 5. Faulty product investigation.

If the GOT is not restored, proceed to (4).

Check if the power is supplied. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to .

■ 5. Faulty product investigation

10

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

10 - 3

(4) Check of the screen display

Check Symptom

Cause/status

The screen is completely black.

The LCD or basic software may be faulty.

Corrective action

Perform the following in order.

1) Write the package data again.

2) Install the basic software again.

If the GOT is not restored by the above

operations, proceed to ■ 5. Faulty product investigation.

The screen is completely white.

A line is displayed on the screen.

The GOT hardware may be faulty.

The GOT hardware may be faulty.

Example: A vertical line is displayed.

Proceed to ■ 5. Faulty product investigation.

□ Other faulty displays

□ The screen freezes.

The screen display is not updated and any operation is unavailable.

Proceed to (5).

(5) Check of buzzer sound

Check Symptom

No buzzer sound

Continues to beep randomly.

Continues to beep in a particular pattern.

□ Beeps continuously.

Cause/status

-

• Buzzer sound:

Corrective action

Proceed to ■ 2. Status of the GOT when it freezes (screen operation stopped).

Example: The rhythm repeats as three beeps, one beep, and two beeps.

When the read device of the system information was set, the device was turned on and the Buzzer Output signal was input.

Check the setting of the read device.

If the Buzzer Output signal has no error, proceed to

■ 2. Status of the GOT when it freezes (screen operation stopped).

10 - 4

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

■2.

Status of the GOT when it freezes (screen operation stopped)

(1) Check of switching to the utility screen

Check Symptom Cause/status

• Error code (system alarm):

□ Possible

Corrective action

When the system alarm display function can be used, take the action for the error code (system alarm) displayed.

If the corrective action cannot be taken, proceed to (2).

□ Impossible

Example:

460 Communication unit error

The system alarm cannot be used.

Proceed to (3).

(2) Executing the I/O check from the GOT utility

Check Symptom Cause/status

• Display details:

Corrective action

□ Communication error

□ No error

Example:

A message indicating that the cause may be a connection error has been displayed.

The hardware such as a communication interface has no error.

Proceed to (3).

Proceed to ■ 3. PLC status.

(3) Check of the objects that are not displayed on the monitor screen

Check Symptom Cause/status

□ Found • Details:

Corrective action

□ Not found

Example:

The numerical display object is not displayed.

Proceed to ■ 3. PLC status.

10

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

10 - 5

■3.

PLC status

(1) PLC failure

Check Symptom

□ Always occurs.

□ Occurs sometimes.

□ Operates normally.

Cause/status

CONTROL-BUS. ERROR, SP. UNIT

LAY. ERROR, or others is considered.

• Error code (system alarm):

Corrective action

Proceed to the following.

Example:

1204 CPU H/W failure

The PLC CPU may be affected by noise or the hardware may be faulty.

• Frequency:

Example: Once a month

• Error code (system alarm):

Proceed to

■ 4. GOT restoration procedure.

Example:

1204 CPU H/W failure

-

10 - 6

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

■4.

GOT restoration procedure

Follow the procedure below starting from 1), and check if the GOT is restored. Mark the corresponding checkbox.

If the GOT is not restored, proceed to the next check item.

No.

Check item Cause/status Corrective action

1)

2)

3)

4)

Press the GOT reset switch. * 1*3

Power on/off the GOT. * 2*3

Reset or power on/off the PLC

CPU.

Power on/off the GOT and PLC

CPU simultaneously.

Check

□ Restored

□ Not restored

□ Restored

□ Not restored

□ Restored

□ Not restored

□ Restored

□ Not restored

If the GOT is restored by the operation on the left, a temporary malfunction or others due to noise is considered.

Take the corrective action of

10.1.2 GOT installation status check sheet.

5) Connect the cable again.

□ Restored

□ Not restored

If the GOT is restored by the operation on the left, the cable connection may be faulty.

Securely connect the cable.

If an error occurs again, proceed to

■ 5. Faulty product investigation.

6)

7)

8)

Write the package data again.

Install the basic software again.

Take the preventive measures

against noise (10.1.2 GOT installation status check sheet).

□ Restored

□ Not restored

□ Restored

□ Not restored

□ Restored

□ Not restored

If the GOT is restored by the operation on the left, data may have been destroyed by an action such as powering off the GOT during the package data writing or basic software installation.

A temporary malfunction or others due to noise is considered.

Do not power off the GOT during data transfer.

If an error occurs again, proceed to

■ 5. Faulty product investigation.

Take the action in 10.1.2 GOT installation status check sheet.

9) Replace the unit.

□ Restored

□ Not restored

If the GOT is restored by the operation on the left, the unit may has a hardware failure.

Install the failure unit to the GOT again to check that the unit causes the malfunction.

After the check, proceed to ■ 5.

Faulty product investigation.

10)

The GOT is not restored even by

1) to 9).

-

Proceed to

■ 5. Faulty product investigation.

*1

*2

*3

Models other than GT23 are the targets. The GOT reset switch does not operate when the bus connection is used.

Models other than GT23 are the targets. When using the bus connection, do not turn off and then on the GOT while the PLC power is on.

Make sure to turn off the PLC first, and turn off and then on the GOT.

Models other than GT23 are the targets. Powering off the GOT causes an error in the control station for the MELSECNET/H connection or in the master station for the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

■5.

Faulty product investigation

If you cannot restore the GOT, consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

Depending on the problem details, we may ask you to send the faulty product to us.

In that case, attach the GOT status check sheet, GOT installation status check sheet, and system configuration check sheet filled with details about your system.

10

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

10 - 7

10.1.2

GOT installation status check sheet

Check the current installation status of your GOT as shown in ■ 1. to ■ 7.

According to the status of the GOT found after a check, take measures described below if necessary.

If the measure is taken, mark the effect, "Effective" or "Ineffective".

Each GOT has the following ground terminals.

• GT27 (except GT2705-V), GT25 GT23: FG terminal and LG terminal

• GT2705-V, GT21 : FG terminal

■1.

Control panel inside wiring

(1) Current status

Check if power lines, such as power cables and servo amplifier driving cables, and communication cables, such as bus connection cables (except for GT23) and network cables, are mixed in the wiring duct inside the control panel.

NFB

MC MC RA RA

□ Mixed

□ Not mixed

(2) Measure for the mixed cables

Wiring the power lines and the communication cables inside the control panel without mixing them in the duct reduces the influence of noise.

NFB

MC MC RA RA

□ Effective

□ Ineffective

■2.

Control panel outside wiring

(1) Current status

Check if the power line and the communication cable are installed together.

Power line

□ Installed together

□ Not installed together

Communication cable

(2) Measure for the cables tied in a bundle

As shown in the figure below, leading the power line and communication cable separately from different places to the outside of the control panel reduces the influence of noise from the power line.

Power line

Communication cable

□ Effective

□ Ineffective

10 - 8

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

Separating the communication cable from the power line or using a separator (made of metal) in the duct, as shown below, reduces the influence of noise.

Power line

Wiring duct Separator

100 mm or more

Signal wire

Power line

Communication cable

□ Effective

□ Ineffective

■3.

Wiring of the FG cable and power line for the GOT

(1) Current status

Check if the FG cable and power line of the GOT are installed together.

GOT

LG FG □ Installed together

□ Not installed together

Power for the power equipment

(2) Measure for the cables tied in a bundle

Separating the FG cable and power line of the GOT reduces the influence of noise.

GOT

LG FG □ Effective

□ Ineffective

Power for the power equipment

■4.

Measures against surge

(1) Current status

Check if a surge suppressor is used for the wiring of the load such as a molded case circuit breaker, electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor.

When a surge suppressor is used, fill in the entry column below with the surge suppressor model and the name of the equipment with the surge suppressor.

PLC

Output

AC

C

R

L a d

L o

□ Used

□ Not used

Entry column

Surge suppressor model Equipment name

10

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

10 - 9

(2) Measure for the equipment without a surge suppressor

Attaching a surge suppressor close to the load reduces the influence of surge on the GOT.

PLC

Output

C

R

L a d

L o

AC

The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load.

□ Effective

□ Ineffective

■5.

Installation status

(1) Current status

Check if the FG cables of the control equipment (such as a PLC) and the power equipment (such as a servo amplifier) are connected as shown in "a" of the following figure.

PLC

Servo amplifier

CN1A CN1B

CN2 CN3

FG a

FG

LG

Panel grounding

Connection cable

FG

LG

GOT

Panel grounding

□ Applicable

□ Not applicable

(2) Measure when a single ground cable is led

Perform independent grounding at two places as shown in Figure A.

The independent grounding reduces the influence of noise.

When independent grounding is unavailable, perform shared grounding as shown in Figure B.

Figure A

PLC Servo amplifier

CN1A CN1B

CN2 CN3

FG

FG

LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding

Terminal block

Grounding for power system

Grounding for control system

GOT

FG

LG

Terminal block

Panel grounding

Grounding for power system

Figure B

□ Effective

□ Ineffective

Servo amplifier

CN1A CN1B

CN2 CN3

FG

FG

LG

PLC

Panel grounding

Connection cable

FG

LG

GOT

Panel grounding

10 - 10

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

■6.

Grounding status of the control panel having the GOT

(1) Current status

Check if a single ground cable is led from the control panel having the control equipment such as a PLC to the control panel having the GOT.

Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment

Connection cable

FG

LG

GOT

□ Applicable

□ Not applicable

(2) Measure when a single ground cable is led

(a) Measure 1

By connecting the ground cable to the control panel having the GOT as shown in Figure A to reduce the potential difference, a malfunction can be prevented.

If wiring as shown in Figure A is unavailable, perform wiring as shown in Figure B.

Figure A

Connection cable

FG

LG

GOT

Ground wires

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

Grounding to the panel

Figure B

□ Effective

□ Ineffective

Connection cable

GOT

Ground wires

FG

LG

10

Grounding to the panel

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

10 - 11

(b) Measure 2

By attaching a ferrite core (KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. RFC-H13 or equivalent) to the ground cable connected to the control panel having the GOT as shown in Figure C, the influence of noise is reduced.

If wiring as shown in Figure C is unavailable, perform wiring as shown in Figure D.

Figure C

Connection cable

GOT

FG

LG

Ground wires

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

Figure D

Connection cable

Ferrite core

Grounding to the panel

GOT

Ground wires

FG

LG

Ferrite core

Grounding to the panel

□ Effective

□ Ineffective

■7.

Power supply system

(1) Current status

Check if the power is supplied for the GOT, I/O equipment (such as a relay), and power equipment (such as a servo amplifier) from the same system.

Isolation transformer

200VAC

Main power

PLC power

I/O power

PLC

GOT □ Applicable

□ Not applicable

I/O equipment

Main circuit power

Power equipment

(2) Measure when a single ground cable is led

By separately wiring the GOT power and the I/O equipment power/power equipment power, and connecting an isolation transformer, the influence of noise is reduced.

Main power

200VAC

Isolation transformer

PLC power

PLC

GOT

I/O power

I/O equipment

Main circuit power

Power equipment

□ Effective

□ Ineffective

10 - 12

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

10.1.3

System configuration check sheet

Fill in the following table with the details of the system configuration, such as the GOT type and unit model.

■1.

System configuration for the GOT

Item

System configuration

Model

GOT (Example: GT2710-STBA)

Communication interface

Usage

-

Communication unit Used, Not used

GOT built-in interface Used, Not used

Option unit

Cable between the controller and GOT

Cable length

Used, Not used

-

-

When using any other units or options, describe them.

■2.

System configuration for the PLC

Item

Power supply module

CPU

Serial communication module

Computer link module

Network module

Interrupt module

Positioning module

Number of PLC extension base units

When using any other units or others, describe them.

Usage

-

-

Used, Not used

Used, Not used

Used, Not used

Used, Not used

-

System configuration

Model extension base units

10

■3.

Entry column for recurrence (when the malfunction has occurred after the corrective action was taken)

Describe the operation situation when the GOT screen froze or the GOT display is faulty at the recurrence.

10.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

10 - 13

10.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection

If an error occurs in the bus connection between the GOT and the PLC CPU and the cause is not clear with the system alarm, perform the troubleshooting described in this section.

For the details of the system alarm, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

For the details of the bus connection, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 compatible for a controller used

10.2.1

Identifying the error position

This section explains how to identify the error position.

For the details of the PLC CPU error and special register, refer to the User's Manual of the PLC CPU used.

■1.

How to identify the error position

Identify the error position, modify the sequence program or replace the module where the error occurs, and check whether the error occurs again.

If the error occurs again, other causes are considered.

Refer to the following to narrow possible error positions.

Refer to the User's Manual of the PLC CPU you use.

(1) Checking the error in the PLC

Step 1.

Check the type of the error detected in the PLC using GX Works2 or others.

Step 2.

Check each module and the installation and grounding status of the cables according to the error message on the PLC CPU.

(2) Checking the error occurrence timing

Check the timing of the error occurrence.

(a) An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset.

The error may be detected in the initial process of the PLC CPU.

In this case, since the faulty module cannot be usually identified, set only the END instruction in the sequence program and remove the modules one by one.

When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed, the module may have caused the error.

(b) An error occurs after or several seconds after a specific operation.

The error may occur in the sequence program.

Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in the step.

You can determine whether the whole sequence program has a problem by setting only the END instruction in the sequence program.

(c) An error occurs when a specific device operates.

A malfunction caused by noise is considered.

Check if any signal line such as a bus connection cable is not installed close to the operating device.

If the line is close to the device, keep a distance of 100 mm or more between the line and the device.

(3) Identifying the module where an error occurs

Identify the module where an error occurs using the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information.

10 - 14

10.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection

10.2.2

Narrowing the possible error positions

If the system cannot be restored even though the module with an error is replaced, another module may cause the error.

Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order, starting from the module at the end of the system, and check for the error.

The module, extension cable, or bus connection cable disconnected immediately before the error does not occur is considered to cause the error.

The following shows examples of narrowing possible error positions. (When QnASCPU and an extension base unit are used)

Example 1: Example 2:

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Disconnect the bus connection cable

(IN side) from the GOT located at the final stage.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Disconnect the bus connection cable (OUT side) from the GOT located at one stage before the final stage.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

If an error does not occur, the GOT located at the final stage may be faulty.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

If an error does not occur, the GOT located at the final stage and the bus connection cable connected to that GOT may be faulty.

Repeat examples 1 and 2 above to identify the error position.

Precautions for narrowing the possible error positions

When disconnecting the modules from the extension base unit in order, setting only the END instruction in the sequence program eliminates errors arising from the sequence program.

Therefore, you can check the error occurrence easily.

When the error does not occur frequently, take time to check the error occurrence with the modules disconnected.

This check is effective to identify a noise invading route when the malfunction is caused by noise.

10

10.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection

10 - 15

10.2.3

Specific example of troubleshooting

With the following system as an example, this section shows a troubleshooting when an error occurs in the PLC CPU.

(When QnASCPU and an extension base unit are used)

PLC

(main base unit)

GOT 1) GOT 2)

Extension cable

PLC

(extension base unit) Bus connection cable

Bus connection cable

Start

Check the error code/step appearing on the PLC CPU.

(Identify the status of the error and the location where the error occurs.)

The SP. UNIT DOWN message appears on the PLC CPU.

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

A further error occurs. (not on PLC CPU.)

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 2) at IN side. (to further identify the error positions)

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

A further error occurs.

(not on the GOT 2) (bus connection unit)).

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 1) at OUT side. (to further identify the error positions)

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

No error occurs.

The bus connection cable connecting the GOT 1) to the GOT 2) is identified as faulty.

Replace the faulty bus connection cable with a new one.

End

10 - 16

10.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection

10.3 Error Messages and System Alarms

This section explains the error messages and system alarms displayed on the GOT.

The system alarm function displays the error code and error message when an error occurs in the GOT, controller, or network.

For the details of the system alarm, refer to the following.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

Error code and channel No.

You can check error codes in the error code storage area of the system information function.

You can check the channel No. where an error occurs with the GOT special register (GS262 to

264).

For the details of the system information and GOT special register, refer to the following.

➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

10.3.1

Displayed contents

The section explains an example of displaying an error code and error message on the GOT.

■1.

Displaying the error codes and error messages with the popup display (Alarm popup display)

When an error occurs, the GOT can display the error code and error message with the popup display at the front of the monitor screen.

Since an alarm pops up regardless of the screen, you cannot miss the error.

A 1254

B 348

A 1254

B 348

04/6/1 13:20 Power module

Generated alarms are popped up regardless of the screen.

■2.

Displaying the error codes and error messages in a list (System alarm display)

When an error occurs, the GOT can display the error codes and error messages in the list set on the screen.

Displaying multiple errors and recording the events as history are available.

10

Date Time

04/6/1 10:25

04/6/1 8:05

Message

Temp.error

Fuse error

Recovered Checked

11:25 10:45

Create a screen to display alarms, and confirm the details of the alarms and take measures for the errors.

10.3 Error Messages and System Alarms

10 - 17

■3.

Checking error messages with the utility (Utility)

You can check the error codes and error messages using the system alarm display of the utility even though its object is not set.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Error codes and reference manuals

Error source Error code Description

Storage location of channel No. with error

*1

Reference

0 to 99

(Value of D9008)

Error code of CPU (ACPU)

User's Manual of the ACPU connected to the GOT

Controller

GOT*5

100 to 299

300 to 399

400 to 499

Error code of the following controllers

FXCPU*2

Non-Mitsubishi PLC

Temperature controller (OMRON temperature controller only)

Error code of the GOT main unit function

Error code of the GOT communication function

GS263

GS262*4

Manual of the controller connected to the GOT

Deal with errors according to the error messages.

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Network

500 to 699

Error code of the GOT main unit function

Error code of the network GS264

CPU

800 to 999

1000 to 10000

(Value of SD0)

Error code of the CPU

(QCPU, LCPU, or QnACPU)

User's Manual of the QCPU, LCPU, or

QnACPU connected to the GOT

Error code of the motion controller

Motion controller

10001 to 10999

User's Manual of the motion controller connected to the GOT

CNC C70 11000 to 11999

(Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU)

Error code of the CNC

(Q173NCCPU)

Error code of the robot controller

GS263

User's Manual of the CNC C70 connected to the GOT

Robot controller

12000 to 12999

(Q172DRCPU)

User's Manual of the robot controller connected to the GOT

Servo amplifier

*3

20016 to 20237 Error code of the servo amplifier

User's Manual of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT

*1 For the details of the GOT special registers (GS262 to GS264), refer to the following.

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

*2 FXCPU has error codes 100 to 109, indicating the status of M8060 to M8069.

(Example) If error code (100) occurs, handle the error according to the M8060 description.

*3 The GOT displays the error code displayed on the servo amplifier (hexadecimal) in decimal + 20000.

Therefore, when referring to the manual of the servo amplifier with the error code displayed on the GOT using the system alarm, subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and convert the last 3 digits into the hexadecimal number.

(Example: When the GOT system alarm shows 20144, the error code of the servo amplifier is 90H.)

*4 Depending on the error code, the channel No. is not stored.

For channel No. storage availability of each error code, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

*5 With the system alarm related to the file access, you cannot identify the drive where the alarm occurs. However, you can identify the drive by checking the File Access Error signal (b7 to b10) of System signal 2-2.

10.3.2

Error messages and system alarms

For the details of the error massages and the system alarms displayed on the GOT, refer to the following.

➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

10 - 18

10.3 Error Messages and System Alarms

11. APPENDICES

11.1

External Dimension Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 2

11.2

Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards . . . . . . . 11 - 22

11.3

Transportation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 23

11

11 - 1

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

■1.

GT2715

322(12.68)

322(12.68)

397(15.63)

10(1.81)

11 - 2

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

382(15.04)

10(1.81)

Unit: mm (inch)

■2.

GT2712, GT2512

241 (9.49)

241 (9.49)

316 (12.44)

301 (11.85)

Unit: mm (inch)

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 3

11

■3.

GT2710,GT2510

208 (8.19)

228 (8.98)

303 (11.93)

11 - 4

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

288 (11.34)

Unit: mm (inch)

■4.

GT2708,GT2508

37.5

(1.48)

166 (6.54)

37.5

(1.48)

171.6 (6.76)

241 (9.49)

226 (8.90)

Unit: mm (inch)

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 5

11

■5.

GT2705

117(4.61)

89(3.51)

167(6.57)

152(5.99)

Unit: mm (inch)

11 - 6

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

■6.

GT2310

208 (8.19)

228 (8.98)

303 (11.93)

288 (11.34)

Unit: mm (inch)

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 7

11

■7.

GT2308

166 (6.54)

166 (6.54)

241 (9.49)

11 - 8

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

226 (8.90)

Unit: mm (inch)

■8.

GT2104

(1) GT2104-RTBD

9.5

(0.4)

18.5

(0.73) 78(3.1)

20.5

(0.81)

78(3.1)

128(5.04)

117(4.61)

Unit: mm (inch)

11

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 9

■9.

GT2103

(1) GT2103-PMBD

9.5

(0.38)

19

(0.75)

64

(2.52)

21

(0.83)

64

(2.52)

113

(4.45)

(2) GT2103-PMBDS

104

(4.10)

Unit: mm (inch)

9.5

(0.38)

19

(0.75)

64

(2.52)

21

(0.83)

64

(2.52)

113

(4.45)

104

(4.10)

Unit: mm (inch)

11 - 10

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

(3) GT2103-PMBDS2

9.5

(0.38)

19

(0.75)

64

(2.52)

21

(0.83)

64

(2.52)

113

(4.45)

(4) GT2103-PMBLS

104

(4.10)

Unit: mm (inch)

9.5

(0.38)

19

(0.75)

64

(2.52)

21

(0.83)

64

(2.52)

113

(4.45)

104

(4.10)

Unit: mm (inch)

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 11

11

■10.

Depth dimensions and cable bend dimensions for the GOT with an extension unit (GT27,

GT25)

The following table shows the depth dimensions and the cable bend dimensions for the GOT with one extension unit.

For the dimensions for the GOT with several extension units mounted in multiple stages, refer to the following.

➠ ■12. Depth dimensions for the GOT with several extension units mounted in multiple stages

(GT27, GT25)

Rear face Side face

100 or more

Extension unit

B

R

C

A

GT2715

GT2712,GT2512

GT2710,GT2510

GT2708,GT2508

GT2705

GOT model

X D

Dimension of X

54(2.13)

46(1.81)

46(1.81)

46(1.81)

54(2.13) unit: mm (inch)

Other device

11 - 12

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

(1) GT2715

Model

GT15-QBUS,

GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL,

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-RS2-9P

*1

,

GT15-RS4-9S

*1

GT15-RS4-TE

*1

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4

GT15-J61BT13

GT25-FNADP

GT27-V4-Z

GT27-R2

GT27-R2-Z

GT27-V4R1-Z

GT27-ROUT

GT27-ROUT-Z

GT27-MMR-Z

GT15-PRN

GT15-DIO

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT

A

88(3.46)

88(3.46)

72.5(2.85)

33.5(1.32)

*3

79(3.11)

65(2.56)

65(2.56)

47(1.85)

-

132(5.20)

75(2.96)

77(3.03)

BNC:

132(5.20)

RGB:

77(3.03)

75(2.96)

77(3.03)

132(5.20)

52(2.05)

77(3.03)

41(1.61)

B

139(5.47)

C

*2

0

0

0

0

*3

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

D

23(0.91)

10(0.39)

23(0.91)

37(1.46)

23(0.91)

25(0.99)

44.5(1.75)

20(0.79)

23(0.91)

44.5(1.75)

20(0.79)

44.5(1.75)

58.5(2.30)

23(0.91)

23(0.91)

Unit: mm (inch)

R (cable bend radius)

50(1.97)

50(1.97)

27.5(1.08)

-

*3

30(1.18)

15(0.59)

26(1.02)

28(1.10)

-

20(0.79)

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

BNC: 20(0.79)

RGB: 32(1.26)

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

-

18(0.71)

43(1.69)

30(1.18)

*1

*2

*3

*4

For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied.

If cable bending radius is smaller than the lowest part of the GOT rear face, the dimension of *3 is equal to or less than

0;however, it is written as "0" in the table.

For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

11

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 13

(2) GT2712, GT2512

Model

GT15-QBUS,

GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL,

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-RS2-9P *1 ,

GT15-RS4-9S *1

GT15-RS4-TE

*1

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2

*4

GT15-J61BT13

GT25-FNADP

GT27-V4-Z *5

GT27-R2 *5

GT27-R2-Z

*5

GT27-V4R1-Z *5

GT27-ROUT

*5

GT27-ROUT-Z

*5

GT27-MMR-Z *5

GT15-PRN

GT15-DIO

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT

A

88(3.46)

88(3.46)

72.5(2.85)

33.5(1.32)

*3

79(3.11)

65(2.56)

65(2.56)

47(1.85)

-

132(5.20)

75(2.96)

77(3.03)

BNC:

132(5.20)

RGB:

77(3.03)

75(2.96)

77(3.03)

132(5.20)

52(2.05)

77(3.03)

B

85(3.35)

C

*2

3(0.12)

3(0.12)

0

0

*3

0

-

0

0

0

47(1.85)

0

0

BNC:

47(1.85)

RGB: 0

0

0

47(1.85)

0

0

D

23(0.91)

10(0.39)

23(0.91)

37(1.46)

23(0.91)

25(0.99)

44.5(1.75)

20(0.79)

44.5(1.75)

44.5(1.75)

20(0.79)

44.5(1.75)

58.5(2.30)

23(0.91)

23(0.91)

Unit: mm (inch)

R (cable bend radius)

50(1.97)

50(1.97)

27.5(1.08)

-

*3

30(1.18)

15(0.59)

26(1.02)

28(1.10)

-

20(0.79)

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

BNC: 20(0.79)

RGB: 32(1.26)

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

20(0.79)

18(0.71)

43(1.69)

41(1.61) 0 30(1.18)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied.

*2 If cable bending radius is smaller than the lowest part of the GOT rear face, the dimension of *3 is equal to or less than

0;however, it is written as "0" in the table.

*3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

*4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

*5 This model cannot be used for GT2512.

11 - 14

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

(3) GT2710,GT2510

Model

GT15-QBUS,

GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL,

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-RS2-9P *1 ,

GT15-RS4-9S *1

GT15-RS4-TE

*1

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2

*4

GT15-J61BT13

GT25-FNADP

GT27-V4-Z *5

GT27-R2 *5

GT27-R2-Z

*5

GT27-V4R1-Z *5

GT27-ROUT

*5

GT27-ROUT-Z

*5

GT27-MMR-Z *5

GT15-PRN

GT15-DIO

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT

A

88(3.46)

88(3.46)

72.5(2.85)

33.5(1.32)

*3

79(3.11)

65(2.56)

65(2.56)

47(1.85)

-

132(5.20)

75(2.96)

77(3.03)

BNC:

132(5.20)

RGB:

77(3.03)

75(2.96)

77(3.03)

132(5.20)

52(2.05)

77(3.03)

41(1.61)

B

78(3.07)

C

*2

10(0.39)

10(0.39)

0

0

*3

1(0.04)

0

0

0

-

54(2.95)

0

0

BNC:

54(2.95)

RGB: 0

0

0

45(1.77)

0

0

0

D

23(0.91)

10(0.39)

23(0.91)

37(1.46)

23(0.91)

25(0.99)

44.5(1.75)

20(0.79)

44.5(1.75)

44.5(1.75)

20(0.79)

44.5(1.75)

58.5(2.30)

23(0.91)

23(0.91)

Unit: mm (inch)

R (cable bend radius)

50(1.97)

50(1.97)

27.5(1.08)

-

*3

30(1.18)

15(0.59)

26(1.02)

28(1.10)

-

20(0.79)

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

BNC: 20(0.79)

RGB: 32(1.26)

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

20(0.79)

18(0.71)

43(1.69)

30(1.18)

*1

*2

*3

*4

*5

For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied.

If cable bending radius is smaller than the lowest part of the GOT rear face, the dimension of *3 is equal to or less than

0;however, it is written as "0" in the table.

For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

This model cannot be used for GT2510.

11

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 15

(4) GT2708,GT2508

Model

GT15-QBUS,

GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL,

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-RS2-9P

*1

,

GT15-RS4-9S

*1

GT15-RS4-TE

*1

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4

GT15-J61BT13

GT25-FNADP

GT27-V4-Z

*5

GT27-R2

*5

GT27-R2-Z

*5

GT27-V4R1-Z

*5

GT27-ROUT *5

GT27-ROUT-Z *5

GT27-MMR-Z

*5

GT15-PRN

GT15-DIO

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT

A

88(3.46)

88(3.46)

72.5(2.85)

33.5(1.32)

*3

79(3.11)

65(2.56)

65(2.56)

47(1.85)

-

132(5.20)

75(2.96)

77(3.03)

BNC:

132(5.20)

RGB:

77(3.03)

75(2.96)

77(3.03)

132(5.20)

52(2.05)

77(3.03)

41(1.61)

B

56(2.20)

C *2

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

16.5(0.65)

0

*3

23(0.91)

9(0.95)

9(0.95)

0

-

76(2.99)

19(0.75)

21(0.83)

BNC:

76(2.99)

RGB:

21(0.83)

19(0.75)

21(0.83)

76(2.99)

0

21(0.83)

0

D

23(0.91)

10(0.39)

23(0.91)

37(1.46)

23(0.91)

25(0.99)

44.5(1.75)

20(0.79)

44.5(1.75)

44.5(1.75)

20(0.79)

44.5(1.75)

58.5(3.82)

23(0.91)

23(0.91)

Unit: mm (inch)

R (cable bend radius)

50(1.97)

50(1.97)

27.5(1.08)

-

*3

30(1.18)

15(0.59)

26(1.02)

28(1.10)

-

20(0.79)

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

BNC: 20(0.79)

RGB: 32(1.26)

32(1.26)

32(1.26)

20(0.79)

18(0.71)

43(1.69)

30(1.18)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied.

*2 If cable bending radius is smaller than the lowest part of the GOT rear face, the dimension of *3 is equal to or less than

0;however, it is written as "0" in the table.

*3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

*4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

*5 This model cannot be used for GT2508.

11 - 16

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

(5) GT2705

Model

GT15-QBUS,

GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL,

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-RS2-9P

*1

,

GT15-RS4-9S

*1

GT15-RS4-TE

*1

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4

GT15-J61BT13

GT25-FNADP

GT15-PRN

GT15-DIO

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT

A

88(3.46)

88(3.46)

72.5(2.85)

33.5(1.32)

*3

79(3.11)

65(2.56)

65(2.56)

47(1.85)

-

52(2.05)

77(3.03)

41(1.61)

B

16(0.63)

C *2

72(2.84)

72(2.84)

56.5(2.23)

0

*3

63(2.48)

49(1.93)

49(1.93)

0

-

36(1.42)

61(2.41)

0

D

23(0.91)

10(0.39)

23(0.91)

37(1.46)

23(0.91)

25(0.99)

23(0.91)

23(0.91)

Unit: mm (inch)

R (cable bend radius)

50(1.97)

50(1.97)

27.5(1.08)

-

*3

30(1.18)

15(0.59)

26(1.02)

28(1.10)

-

18(0.71)

43(1.69)

30(1.18)

*1

*2

*3

*4

For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied.

If cable bending radius is smaller than the lowest part of the GOT rear face, the dimension of *3 is equal to or less than

0;however, it is written as "0" in the table.

For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

■11.

Depth dimensions for the GOT with an SD card unit (GT2103-P)

The following table shows the depth dimensions for the GOT with an SD card unit.

GT2103-PMBD

Rear face Side face

80(3.15) or more

GT2103-PMBDS,

GT2103-PMBDS2

Side face

80(3.15) or more

11

X

D

SD card unit

GOT type

GT2103-PMBD

GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS2

32(1.26)

27(1.07)

*1 GT2103-PMBLS can not mount the SD card unit.

X

Other device

5(0.20)

5(0.20)

X D

Other device

Unit: mm (inch)

D

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 17

■12.

Depth dimensions for the GOT with several extension units mounted in multiple stages

(GT27, GT25)

The following shows how to calculate the depth dimensions for the GOT with several extension units mounted in multiple stages.

For the dimensions for the GOT with one extension unit, refer to the dimension D in .

Step 1.

Select the GOT main unit coefficient from the following table.

100 (3.94)or more

E

F

GT27, GT25

GOT type

Other device Unit: mm (inch)

G (main unit coefficient)

1.5(0.06)

Step 2.

Select the option coefficient of the extension unit from the following table.

Model

GT27-V4-Z

*1*2

, GT27-R2-Z

*1*2

, GT27-V4R1-Z

*1*2

, GT27-ROUT-Z

*1*2

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE,

GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13, GT15-PRN, GT15-DIO,

GT15-DIOR, GT15-SOUT

GT27-MMR-Z

*1*2

GT15-J71GP23-SX

*1

, GT15-J71GF13-T2

*1

H (option coefficient)

43.0(1.69)

21.5(0.85)

57.0(2.24)

35.5(1.40)

*1 Mounting GT27-V4-Z, GT27-R2-Z, GT27-V4R1-Z, GT27-ROUT-Z, or GT27-MMR-Z requires two stages. When mounting GT15-

J71GP23-SX or GT15-J71GF13-T2 on any of the above units, mount it in the third stage.

*2 The extension unit cannot be used on GT2705, GT2512, GT2510, or GT2508.

Step 3.

Substitute the coefficients selected in step 1 and step 2 to the following formula.

E (for two extension units) = G (GOT main unit coefficient) + H (option coefficient) + H (option coefficient)

F (for three extension units) = G (GOT main unit coefficient) + H (option coefficient) + H (option coefficient)

+ H (option coefficient)

Calculation example:

Dimension F (for three extension units) for installing the multimedia unit (GT27-MMR-Z) in the first stage and the second stage,and the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit (GT15-J71GP23-SX) in the third stage on the GT2712

F (for three extension units) = -3.5 (main unit coefficient of GT2712) + 57.0(option coefficient of GT27-MMR-

Z) + 35.5 (option coefficient of GT15-J71GP23-SX) = 89.0

When the above two extension units are installed, the dimension F is 89.0 mm.

11 - 18

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

■13.

External dimension diagrams of the communication cable

(1) External dimension diagrams of the bus connection cable connector

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.))

External dimension diagram

GT15-QC □ B

GT15-QC □ BS

0.6(2.0),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16),10(33)

15(49),20(66),25(82),30(98),35(115)

(a)

(a) GT15-QC □ B, GT15-QC □ BS

10(0.39)

34.5

(1.36) 145

(5.71)

L

95

(3.74)

Unit: mm (inch)

(2) External dimension diagrams of the RS-232 connection cable connector

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions

GT01-C30R2-6P

GT01-C30R2-9S

GT01-C30R2-25P

GT10-C30R2-6P

3(10)

3(10)

3(10)

3(10)

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(a) GT01-C30R2-6P

16

(0.63)

50

(1.97)

3000

(118.11)

40

(1.57)

13

(0.51)

Unit: mm (inch)

(b) GT01-C30R2-9S

(c)

16(0.63) 50(1.97)

GT01-C30R2-25P

3000(118.11)

Φ 6(0.24)

50(1.97) 16(0.63)

Unit: mm (inch)

16

(0.63)

50

(1.97)

3000

(118.11)

53

(2.09)

16

(0.63)

(d) GT10-C30R2-6P

30

(1.18)

Unit: mm (inch)

3000

(118.11)

Approx. 48

(1.89)

200

(7.87)

40

(1.57)

Unit: mm (inch)

11

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 19

(3) External dimension diagrams of the RS-422 connection cable connector

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions

GT16-C02R4-9S

GT01-C30R4-25P

GT01-C □ R4-25P

GT01-C □ R4-8P

GT10-C □ R4-8P

GT10-C □ R4-25P

GT10-C10R4-8PL

0.2(0.7)

3(10)

10(33),20(66),30(98)

1(3),3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98)

1(3),3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98)

3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98)

1(3)

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

(a) GT16-C02R4-9S

15

(0.59)

45.5

(1.79)

200

(7.87)

5(0.20)

38

(1.50)

8

(0.31)

Unit: mm (inch)

(b) GT01-C30R4-25P

16

(0.63)

50

(1.97)

3000

(118.11)

53

(2.09)

16

(0.63)

Unit: mm (inch)

(c) GT01-C □ R4-25P

Fig.13

16

(0.63)

50

(1.97)

(d) GT01-C □ R4-8P

16

(0.63)

50

(1.97)

L

L 53

(2.09)

16

(0.63)

Unit: mm (inch)

40

(1.57)

13

(0.51)

Unit: mm (inch)

(e) GT10-C □ R4-8P

30

(1.18)

L

250

(9.84)

40

(1.57)

Unit: mm (inch)

(f) GT10-C □ R4-25P

30

(1.18)

L

250

(9.84)

53

(2.09) 16

(0.63)

Unit: mm (inch)

11 - 20

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

(g) GT10-C10R4-8PL

30

(1.18)

1000

(39.4) 250

(9.84)

38

(1.50)

Unit: mm (inch)

(4) External dimension diagrams of RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

Cable model

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL □ 0.5, 1, 2

Cable length (m(ft.))

(a)

(a) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL □

8

(0.31)

35

(1.38)

L

18

50

(1.97)

(0.71)

47(1.85)

4

(0.16)

External dimensions

29

(1.14)

Unit: mm (inch)

11

11.1 External Dimension Diagrams

11 - 21

11.2 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

11.2.1

GT27, GT25, GT23

■1.

Rating plate

The GOT hardware version, BootOS version, function version, and conforming standards can be confirmed at the rating plate on the GOT rear face.

PASSED

GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL

MODEL

GT2708-VTBA

IN

POWER

100-240VAC 50/60Hz

MAX 100VA

MAC ADD.

SERIAL

DATE

123456789012

00013910AA00000-A

2013-09

MADE IN JAPAN

Conforming standard

QR code

MAC address

GOT serial number

0 0 0 1 3 9 1 0 A A 0 0 0 0 0 - A

Function version

BootOS version

Hardware version

Manufacturing date

Manufacturing month

(1 to 9: manufacturing month,

X: October, Y: November, Z: December)

Manufacturing year

(lower two digits of the year of grace)

■2.

Packing box

The conforming standards can be confirmed by the label on the packing box.

Note that the position of the label differs depending on the model or the shipment date.

The conforming standards

(such as CE) are described.

11 - 22

11.2 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

11.2.2

GT21

■1.

Rating plate

The GOT hardware version, BootOS version , and conforming standards can be confirmed at the rating plate on the

GOT rear face.

QR code

GOT serial number

1 4 4 0 0 0 1 A A

Certification mark MAC address

BootOS version

Hardware version

Manufacture month

(1 to 9, X: October, Y: November,

Z: December)

Manufacture year

(Last two digits of a year)

■2.

Packing box

The conforming standards can be confirmed by the label on the packing box.

Note that the position of the label differs depending on the shipment date.

The conforming standards are described.

11.3 Transportation Precautions

When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

11.3.1

Relevant models

The battery for the GOT2000 series is classified as shown in the table below.

Product name Model Description

Battery for GOT2000 series GT11-50BAT Lithium battery

Handled as

Non-dangerous goods

11.3.2

Transportation guidelines

Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment. When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location, make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG

Code, and other local transportation regulations.

For details, please consult your transportation company.

11

11.3 Transportation Precautions

11 - 23

11.4 Calculating consumed current of GT2705-V

For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GT2705-V can supply.

GOT other than GT2705-V, the calculation of the current value is not required.

For the current that the GT2705-V can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller,refer to the following tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GT2705-V.

■1.

Current supply capacity of the GOT

Can be supplied current of GT2705-V is 1.3A.

■2.

Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller

Module type

Consumed current

(A)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-75QBUSL,

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75ABUSL,

GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-RS4-TE

GT15-J71GP23-SX

GT15-J71GF13-T2

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

GT15-J61BT13

GT25-FNADP

Barcode reader

GT15-PRN

GT15-SOUT

GT15-DIO

GT15-DIOR

RFID controller

0.275 *1

0.12

0.1

0.1

*2

0.4

*2

0.09

0.08

0.96

0.56

0.77

0.56

0.29

0.33

0.3

1.07

*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function.

For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.

*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)

■3.

Calculation example

(1) When connecting the GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-RS2-9P (2 units) to the GT2705-V

Current supply capacity of GT2705-V 1.3A

Total consumed current 0.275+0.29+0.29=0.855A

Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GT2705-V, they can be connected to the GT2705-V.

(2) When connecting the GT15-J71GP23-SX and GT15-RS2-9P (2 units) to the GT2705-V

Current supply capacity of GT2705-V 1.3A

Total consumed current 1.07+0.29+0.29=1.65A

Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GT2705-V, such configuration is not allowed.

11 - 24

11.4 Calculating consumed current of GT2705-V

REVISIONS

Print Date

September 2013

November 2013

January 2014

April 2014

June 2014

July 2014

October 2014

January 2015

April 2015

May 2015

June 2015

* Manual Number

SH(NA)-081194ENG-A

SH(NA)-081194ENG-B

SH(NA)-081194ENG-C

SH(NA)-081194ENG-D

SH(NA)-081194ENG-E

SH(NA)-081194ENG-F

SH(NA)-081194ENG-G

SH(NA)-081194ENG-H

SH(NA)-081194ENG-I

SH(NA)-081194ENG-J

SH(NA)-081194ENG-K

* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Revision

First printing : GT Designer3 Version1.100E

Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.104J

• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed

• Abbreviations and generic terms changed

• Compatible with printer unit

• Compatible with wireless LAN connection (to be supported soon)

• General specifications changed

• Performance specifications changed

• Printer unit added to the list of Depth dimensions and cable bend dimensions for the GOT with an extension unit, and Depth dimensions for the GOT with several extension units mounted in multiple stages.

Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.108N

• Abbreviations and generic terms changed

• Installation Position changed

• Depth dimensions and cable bend dimensions for the GOT with an extension unit changed

Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.112S

• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed

• Abbreviations and generic terms changed

• GT2715-X, GT25, and options added

Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.117X

• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed

• Vertical installation of GT27, GT25, and GT23 supported

Cotible with GT Works3 Version1.118Y

• Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed

• Battery installation and removal procedures changed

Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.122C

• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed.

• Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications are changed.

• GT21 is supported.

• GT2512-S is supported.

Writing errors have been corrected.

Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.130L

• Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications are changed.

• Field network adapter unit is supported.

• RGB input unit (GT27-R2) is supported.

• RGB output unit (GT27-ROUT) is supported.

• GT2705-V, GT2104-R, GT2103-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBLS is supported.

• The SD cards added

Writing errors have been corrected.

The model names of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit set have been added.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

© 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

REVISIONS - 1

REVISIONS - 2

WARRANTY

Please check the following product warranty details before using this product.

Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.

However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion.

Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.

(1) Gratis Warranty Term

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place.

Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months.

The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.

(2) Gratis Warranty Range

(a) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.

If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer’s expense.

The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation.

(b) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods, and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.

(c) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged in the following cases.

• Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.

• Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.

• When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.

• Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.

• Replacing consumable parts such as a battery, backlight, and fuse.

• Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.

• Failure caused by reasons that could not be predicted by scientific technology standards at the time of shipment from

Mitsubishi.

• Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.

Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.

(2) Mitsubishi shall not accept a request for product supply (including spare parts) after production is discontinued.

Overseas service

Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center.

Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.

Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test operation and other tasks.

Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals, or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

Product application

(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.

(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.

Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.

In addition, applications in which human life or property could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical, railway applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment, recreation and amusement devices, safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal.

Even for the above applications, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required, after the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative.

MELDAS, MELSEC, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, and CC-Link IE are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows NT, Windows Server, SQL Server, Visual C++, Visual C#, Visual Basic,

Excel, and Access are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.

MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.

DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).

VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.

Unicode is a trademark or registered trademark of Unicode, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

PictBridge is a registered trademark of Canon Inc.

Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates in the United States and other countries.

QR Code is a trademark or registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan, the United States, and/or other countries.

Other company and product names herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

SH(NA)-081194ENG-K

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

MODEL GOT2000-U-HW-E

MODEL

CODE

1D7MJ5

SH(NA)-081194ENG-K(1506)MEE

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy,

Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, June 2015.

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals